Yamaha htr 5740 инструкция на русском

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Yamaha Manuals
  4. Receiver
  5. HTR 5740 — 6.1 Channel Digital Home Theater Receiver

Manuals and User Guides for Yamaha HTR 5740 — 6.1 Channel Digital Home Theater Receiver. We have 1 Yamaha HTR 5740 — 6.1 Channel Digital Home Theater Receiver manual available for free PDF download: Owner’s Manual

Скачать

Страница из 76

HTR-5750/HTR-5740

AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL

U

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book  Page 1  Tuesday, February 17, 2004  10:29 AM

Руководства Yamaha HTR-5740 Размер файлов: 5806 KB, Язык: English, Формат: pdf, Платформа: Windows/Linux, Дата: 2015-07-05

На данной странице вы можете скачать руководства Yamaha HTR-5740. Мы предлагаем вам ознакомиться с руководством пользователя, инструкцией по сервисному обслуживанию и ремонту.

Также здесь вы найдете список заказных номеров на комплектующие Yamaha HTR-5740.

Все файлы предоставляются исключительно в ознакомительных целях. И не являютя руководством по ремонту, а направлены лишь на то чтобы помочь вам более детально ознакомиться с принципом построения устройства.

Содержимое представленных здесь руководств требуют от вас знания технического английского языка.

Если вы собираетесь скачать руководство по сервисному обслуживанию Yamaha HTR-5740, иными словами сервис мануал, вы дожны обладать хотя бы минимальными познаниями в области электроники и пониманием базовых принципов работы электромеханических устройств.

Для просмотра руководств вам понадобится Adobe Acrobat Reader версии 9 и выше либо другая программа для просмотра pdf файлов.

В связи с популярностью информации представленной на сайте и ее бесплатного предоставления конечному пользователю, убедительная просьба использовать специальные программные продукты для многопотокового скачивания файлов.

Руководства для Yamaha HTR-5740

  • Руководство пользователя (User manual)
  • Руководство по сервисному обслуживанию (Service manual)
  • Руководство по ремонту (Repair manual)
  • Перечень комплектующих (PartList)

Yamaha HTR-5740 Manual | Manualzz

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
U
HTR-5750/HTR-5740
AV Receiver
OWNER'S MANUAL
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page i Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
10
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
•
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
i
11
Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the product is operated.
Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use
a damp cloth for cleaning.
Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by
the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –
for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;
and the like.
Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
A product and cart combination should be moved with care.
Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven
surfaces may cause the product and cart
combination to overturn.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack
unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s
instructions have been adhered to.
Power Sources – This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,
consult your product dealer or local power company. For
products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped
with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not
defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched
by items placed upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the product.
Lightning – For added protection for this product during a
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line
surges.
Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such
power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna
system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching
such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension
cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result
in a risk of fire or electric shock.
Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind
into this product through openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result
in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on
the product.
Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself
as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page ii Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
d)
20
21
22
23
If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal
operation,
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f)
When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service.
Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating
condition.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
24
Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,
provides information with regard to proper grounding of the
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire
to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s
attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides
guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies
that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding
system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as
practical.
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to
follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to
use this product in the USA.
3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that
your use of this product in a residential environment will
not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this
product is found to be the source of interference, which
can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
ii
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page iii Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this
manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future
reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool,
dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat
sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.
Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top,
20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of
this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical
appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid
humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature
changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit
in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with
a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this
unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may
fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to
liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit,
do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage
and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall
and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user
and/or damage to this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,
curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If
the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may
overheat, possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall
outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this
might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.
Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified
is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this
unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be
held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the
power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical
storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact
qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any
service is needed. The cabinet should never be
opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods
of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug
from the wall outlet.
16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section
on common operating errors before concluding that
this unit is faulty.
17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set
this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the
AC power plug from the wall outlet.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as
long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself
is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this
state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of
power.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association's Consumer
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your
equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound
come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or
distortion - and, most importantly, without affecting your
sensitive hearing.
iii
Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often
undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group recommend you to avoid
prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
FEATURES............................................................. 2
GETTING STARTED............................................ 3
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
DESCRIPTIONS...............................................39
Supplied accessories .................................................. 3
Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3
For movie/video sources.......................................... 39
For music sources .................................................... 41
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4
PREPARATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................42
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 42
Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 43
Using the test tone ................................................... 43
SET MENU ............................................................44
CONNECTIONS .................................................. 13
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................51
Before connecting components................................ 13
Connecting video components................................. 14
Connecting audio components................................. 17
Connecting the antennas .......................................... 18
Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 19
Turning on the power............................................... 21
Control area ............................................................. 51
Setting manufacturer codes...................................... 52
Controlling other components ................................. 53
Clearing setup manufacturer codes.......................... 54
BASIC SETUP ...................................................... 22
Using the BASIC SETUP menu .............................. 22
BASIC
OPERATION
Speaker placement ................................................... 10
Speaker connections ................................................ 11
Using SET MENU................................................... 45
1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 46
2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 48
3 OPTION MENU................................................... 49
SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 10
PREPARATION
Front panel ................................................................. 4
Remote control........................................................... 6
Using the remote control ........................................... 7
Front panel display .................................................... 8
Rear panel .................................................................. 9
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
BASIC OPERATION
PLAYBACK.......................................................... 25
Basic operations....................................................... 25
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 27
Selecting input modes.............................................. 31
TUNING ................................................................ 33
What is a sound field ............................................... 55
Changing parameter settings ................................... 55
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER
DESCRIPTIONS...............................................57
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................59
RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS ........63
GLOSSARY...........................................................64
Audio formats .......................................................... 64
Sound field programs............................................... 65
Audio information ................................................... 65
Video signal information ......................................... 66
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 33
Presetting stations .................................................... 34
Selecting preset stations........................................... 36
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 37
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......55
SPECIFICATIONS...............................................67
RECORDING ....................................................... 38
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
1
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 2 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
FEATURES
FEATURES
Built-in 6-channel power amplifier
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner
Minimum RMS output power
[ HTR-5750 ]
(0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω)
Front: 90 W + 90 W
Center: 90 W
Surround: 90 W + 90 W
Surround back: 90 W
[ HTR-5740 ]
(0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω)
Front: 85 W + 85 W
Center: 85 W
Surround: 85 W + 85 W
Surround back: 85 W
◆ 40-station random access preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
Sound field features
◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of
sound fields
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6,
DTS 96/24 decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic
IIx decoder
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA™
Other features
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ A SET MENU which provides you with items for
optimizing this unit for your audio/video system
◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input
◆ Component video input/output capability
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Sleep timer
◆ Cinema and music night listening modes
◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes
[ HTR-5750 only ]
◆ S-Video signal input/output capability
◆ Video signal conversion (Composite video ↔ S-Video)
capability for monitor out
• This document is the owner’s manual for both HTR-5750 and HTR-5740. Model names are given where the details of functions are
unique to each model. Illustrations for HTR-5750 are mainly used for explanations.
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button
names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In
case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA
CORPORATION.
2
“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 3 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
GETTING STARTED
GETTING STARTED
INTRODUCTION
Supplied accessories
Please check that you received all of the following parts.
Remote control
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
Batteries (4)
(AAA, R03, UM-4)
SYSTEM
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
TV
AV
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
SLEEP
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
MULTI CH IN
AM loop antenna
75-ohm/300-ohm antenna
adapter (U.K. model only)
AMP
VCR
TV VOL
TV CH
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
1
2
3
4
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV THTR
MOVIE
5
6
7
8
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
9
0
VOLUME
MUTE
10
ROCK
ENTER
Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada and
China models)
EFFECT
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
TITLE
SET MENU
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
TEST
RETURN
Indoor FM antenna
(U.K., Europe, Australia
and Korea models)
DISPLAY
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS
MODE
PTY SEEK START
EON
RAV251
WC55290 EU
Installing batteries in the remote
control
2
1
3
Notes on batteries
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the condition like; the
operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator
does not flash or its light becomes dim.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program
any acquired functions that may have been cleared.
Press the
part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.
2
Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03,
UM-4) according to the polarity markings
(+ and –) on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3
Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.
English
1
3
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 4 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
1
2
3 4
5
6
7
8
9
0
(U.S.A. model)
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
PRESET/TUNING
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
l PRESET/TUNING h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
NEXT
EDIT
INPUT
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
VIDEO AUX
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
VIDEO
SILENT CINEMA
L
AUDIO
R
EON
MODE
A
B
CDE
F
G
1 STANDBY/ON
Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When you
turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4
to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound.
Note
In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in
order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control.
H
I
START
J
6 PRESET/TUNING l / h (LEVEL –/+)
Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is
displayed next to the band indication in the front panel
display when the unit is in tuner mode. Selects the tuning
frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed.
Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using
A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) when the unit is not in tuner mode.
2 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control.
7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for
more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.
3 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this
unit.
8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
Switches between automatic tuning (AUTO indicator on)
and manual tuning (AUTO indicator off).
4 FM/AM
Switches the reception band between FM and AM.
9 VIDEO AUX jacks
Input audio and video signals from a portable external
source such as a game console. To reproduce source
signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source.
5 A/B/C/D/E (NEXT)
Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when
the unit is in tuner mode.
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted when the unit is
not in tuner mode.
4
0 VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
This does not affect the REC OUT level.
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 5 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
INTRODUCTION
A
PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals
are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers.
All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down
to the left and right headphone channels.
B SPEAKERS A/B
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A
and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the
corresponding button is pressed.
C PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)
Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h
(LEVEL –/+) between selecting preset station numbers
and tuning.
D STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is
selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are
output directly from their respective speakers without
effect processing.
E CONTROL
Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left and
right speakers (see page 26).
F BASS/TREBLE –/+
Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left and
right speakers (in conjunction with CONTROL).
G PROGRAM l / h
Use to select sound field programs (see page 26).
H INPUT MODE
Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of
signals received when one component is connected to two
or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 31).
I INPUT selector
Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.
J MULTI CH INPUT
Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes
priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input
selector buttons on the remote control).
English
5
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 6 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Remote control
This section describes the function of each control on the
remote control used to control this unit. To operate other
components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on
page 51.
1
2
9
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
SYSTEM
3
STANDBY
0
POWER
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
SLEEP
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
MULTI CH IN
A
AMP
VCR
B
C
D
E
TV VOL
TV CH
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
VOLUME
F
MUTE
4
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
1
2
3
4
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV THTR
MOVIE
5
6
7
8
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
9
0
5
6
10
ENTER
G
H
EFFECT
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
TITLE
SET MENU
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
7
8
ROCK
I
SELECT
TEST
RETURN
DISPLAY
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS
MODE
PTY SEEK START
EON
3 Input selector buttons
Select the input source and change the control area.
4 Sound field program / numeric buttons (1 - 8)
Use to select sound field programs.
Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when the
unit is in tuner mode.
5 NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 30).
6 LEVEL
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the
level.
7 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i / SELECT
Use to select and adjust sound field program parameters or
SET MENU items.
Press u / d to select preset station numbers when the unit
is in tuner mode.
8 TEST (RETURN)
Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.
Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the
SET MENU parameters.
9 TRANSMIT indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.
0 STANDBY
Sets this unit in the standby mode.
A SYSTEM POWER
Turns on the power of this unit.
B SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer.
C MULTI CH IN
Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external
decoder (etc.).
D AMP
Selects the AMP mode. You must select the AMP mode to
control the main unit.
E VOLUME –/+
Increases or decreases the volume level.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
2 CODE SET
Use to set up manufacturer codes (see page 52).
6
F MUTE
Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to
the previous volume level.
G EX/ES
Switches between 5.1 or 6.1-channel playback of multichannel software.
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 7 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
I SET MENU (A/B/C/D/E)
Activates the SET MENU function.
Selects preset station groups when the unit is in tuner
mode.
Using the remote control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on the main unit during operation.
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
PRESET/TUNING
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
NEXT
EDIT
l PRESET/TUNING h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
INTRODUCTION
H STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is
selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are
output directly from their respective speakers without
effect processing.
INPUT
PHONES
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
A
B
l
PROGRAM
h
VIDEO AUX
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
VIDEO
SILENT CINEMA
30
30
CODE SET
L
AUDIO
R
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
TRANSMIT
SYSTEM
POWER POWER STANDBY POWER
TV
CD
DVD
AV
MD/CD-R TUNER
SLEEP
DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN
VCR
AMP
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
1
2
3
MUTE
MUSIC ENTERTAINTV THTR
5
6
7
q/DTS
NIGHT
9
0
ROCK
4
MOVIE
8
EX/ES STRAIGHT
10
ENTER
EFFECT
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
TITLE
SET MENU
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
TEST
RETURN
DISPLAY
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
■ Handling the remote control
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote
control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the
following types of conditions:
– high humidity such as near a bath
– high temperature such as near a heater or stove
– extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
English
7
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 8 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel display
1
2
t
96
24
q EX
q PL
q PL
q PL x
3
VCR
SILENT CINEMA
MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL
SP
AB
q DIGITAL
4
5
V-AUX
6
DTV/CBL
78
MD/CD-R
DVD
NIGHT
PTY HOLD AUTO
SLEEP
HiFi DSP
PS
90
TUNER
CD
PTY RT CT
EON
dB
ft
mS
dB
D
E
F G
1 Decoder indicators
When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective
indicator lights up.
2 SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 26).
H
B
TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME
PCM
C
A
I
96/24
L C R
LFE SL SB SR
JK
L
B VOLUME level indication
Indicates the volume level.
C PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code
modulation) digital audio signals.
3 NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select night listening mode.
D VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 31).
4 Input source indicators
A cursor lights to show the current input source.
E Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
5 Sound field indicators
Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
F SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.
Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are
selected.
Presence DSP sound field
Listening position
Left surround
DSP sound field
Right surround
DSP sound field
Surround back DSP sound field
6 CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field
program.
7 AUTO indicator
Lights up to indicate that automatic tuning is possible.
8 TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station.
9 STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an
FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.
0 MEMORY indicator
Blinks to show that a station can be stored.
A MUTE indicator
Blinks while the MUTE function is on.
8
G SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on.
H HiFi DSP
Lights when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program.
I Multi-information display
Shows the current sound field program name and other
information when adjusting or changing settings.
J 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
K LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.
L Input channel indicators/speaker indicators
Indicate the channel components of the current digital
input signal.
Indicate the number of speakers connected in SPEAKERS
(page 23), or indicate the channel being adjusted in SP
LEVEL (page 47).
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 9 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Rear panel
2
3
4
INTRODUCTION
1
(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
DVD
MULTI CH INPUT
R
L
AUDIO
R
VIDEO
L
FRONT
VIDEO
S VIDEO
AC OUTLETS
COAXIAL
TUNER
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
SWITCHED
MONITOR
OUT
DTV
/CBL
CD SURROUND
OPTICAL
DTV
/CBL
DVD
DIGITAL
INPUT
DTV/CBL
IN
VCR
DVD
MD/CD-R
+
R
–
FRONT
SPEAKERS
–
L
+
+
R
–
SURROUND
–
L
+
GND
IN
(PLAY)
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
A
MD
/CD-R
VIDEO
OUT
(REC)
SUB
WOOFER
S VIDEO
AUDIO
B
75Ω UNBAL.
MONITOR OUT
FM
ANT
L
R
MD/CD-R
AM
ANT
OUT
CD
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
+
–
–
+
+
CENTER
–
– SURROUND
+
BACK
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
5
6
7
8
1 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
[ HTR-5750 ]
CD5, DTV/CBL4, DVD3, MD/CD-R2
[ HTR-5740 ]
CD3, DTV/CBL2, DVD1
See pages 14, 16 and 17 for details.
2 MULTI CH INPUT jacks
See page 15 for connection information.
3 Video component jacks
See pages 14 and 16 for connection information.
S VIDEO jacks are only available for HTR-5750.
4 AC OUTLET(S)
Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see
page 19).
9
0
5 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack (HTR-5750 only)
See page 17 for details.
6 Audio component jacks
See page 17 for connection information.
7 SUB WOOFER OUTPUT jack
See page 12 for connection information.
8 Antenna terminals
See page 18 for connection information.
9 Speaker terminals
See page 12 for connection information.
0 IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
See page 20.
English
9
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 10 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
SPEAKER SETUP
SPEAKER SETUP
Surround speakers (SR and SL)
Speaker placement
The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R
speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and
multi-channel audio sources.
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above
the floor.
Surround back speaker (SB)
FL
C
FR
The surround back speaker supplements the surround
speakers and provides for more realistic front-to-back
transitions. Place this speaker directly behind the listening
position and at the same height as the surround speakers.
30˚
Subwoofer
SL
SR
60˚
SL
80˚
SR
SB
1.8 m (6 ft)
Front speakers (FR and FL)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from
the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker
from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front
face of the center speaker with the front face of your video
monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front
speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as
directly over or under it.
10
The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active
Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only
for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,
but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and
DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so
critical, because low bass sounds are not highly
directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the
front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the
room to reduce wall reflections.
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 11 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
SPEAKER SETUP
Speaker connections
5
Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),
“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are
faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the
polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound
will be unnatural and lack bass.
•
•
•
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped
differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.
Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)
terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain
cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
5
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
■ Banana plug connections
(With the exception of U.K. and Europe models)
First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug
connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.
Banana plug
(With the exception of U.K. and
Europe models)
10 mm (3/8")
1
4
PREPARATION
•
CAUTION
If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set
this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 6
ohms before using (see page 20).
Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the
power of this unit is off.
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do
not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This
could damage this unit and/or speakers.
Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of
speakers still creates the interference with the monitor,
place the speakers away from the monitor.
3
2
1
Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8") of
insulation from the end of each speaker
cable.
2
Twist the exposed wires of the cable together
to prevent short circuits.
3
Unscrew the knob.
4
Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side
of each terminal.
English
11
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 12 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
SPEAKER SETUP
Front speakers (A)
Right
Left
Subwoofer
system
1
Surround speakers
Right
Left
2
3
6
7
(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)
+
R
–
FRONT
SPEAKERS
–
L
+
+
R
–
+
+
CENTER
–
SURROUND
–
L
+
A
B
SUB
WOOFER
OUTPUT
+
–
–
Front
speakers
(B)
+
– SURROUND
BACK
4
5
Center
speaker
Surround back
speaker
■ FRONT terminals
Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If
you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the
FRONT A or B terminals.
Note
The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems
simultaneously.
■ CENTER terminals
Connect a center speaker to these terminals.
4
2
1
7
■ SURROUND terminals
Connect surround speakers to these terminals.
■ SUB WOOFER jack
Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
to this jack.
■ SURROUND BACK terminals
Connect a surround back speaker to these terminals.
12
6
3
Speaker layout
5
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 13 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
CONNECTIONS
CONNECTIONS
Before connecting components
CAUTION
Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains
power until all connections between components are
complete.
Dust protection cap
Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect
the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are
not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in
place. This cap protects the jack from dust.
■ Video jacks
For analog signals
left analog cables
L
right analog cables
R
For digital signals
optical cables
O
coaxial cables
C
For video signals
video cables
S-Video cables
[ HTR-5750 ]
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.
The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit
are automatically converted for output through the VIDEO
jacks. When V CONV. is set to ON (see page 49), signals
input through the VIDEO jacks can be output through the
S VIDEO jacks.
V
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PREPARATION
■ Cable indications
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
S
V
V
■ Analog jacks
V
You can input analog signals from audio components by
connecting audio pin cable to the analog jacks on this unit.
Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the
left jacks.
[ HTR-5740 ]
This unit has two types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
■ Digital jacks
This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital
signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You
can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both
the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to
the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital
input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital
signals.
Note
This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus
audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the
analog OUT (REC) jacks.
[ HTR-5750 only ] Likewise audio signals input to the digital
(OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the DIGITAL
OUTPUT jack.
VIDEO jack
For conventional composite video signals.
S VIDEO jack ( HTR-5750 only )
For S-Video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color
reproduction.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in
picture reproduction.
Note
[ HTR-5750 only ] When signals are input through both the S
VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO
jack have priority.
English
13
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 14 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
CONNECTIONS
Signal flow inside this unit (HTR-5740)
Signal flow inside this unit (HTR-5750)
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
Input
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
Only when V CONV. is set to ON
(see page 49).
Connecting video components
■ Connections for DVD playback
Optical out
Video out
DVD player
Audio out
R
O
L
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
DVD
AUDIO
R
VIDEO
L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
Video in
DVD
VIDEO
S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)
14
Video
monitor
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 15 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUB WOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or preamplifier.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)
L
PREPARATION
R
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
R
L
Subwoofer
out
R
L
Center
out
Front
out
Multi-format player/
External decoder Surround
out
Notes
• When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you
cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
• When headphones are used, only front left and right channels are output.
English
15
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 16 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
CONNECTIONS
■ Connections for other video components
Optical out
Cable TV or
satellite tuner
Video out
Audio out
O
R
L
(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)
COMPONENT VIDEO
PB
Y
PR
AUDIO
VIDEO
L
R
VIDEO
S VIDEO
DTV
/CBL
DIGITAL
INPUT
COAXIAL
DTV
/CBL
CD
OPTICAL
DTV/CBL
IN
VCR
OUT
R
L
R
L
Audio in
Audio out
Video in
DVD recorder
or VCR
Video out
■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a
game console or video camera, to this unit.
VIDEO AUX
VIDEO
L
V
L
AUDIO
R
R
Audio out R
Audio out L
Video out
16
Game
console or
video camera
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 17 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
CONNECTIONS
Connecting audio components
■ Connections for audio components
(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)
PREPARATION
DIGITAL
INPUT
Coaxial out
COAXIAL
CD
C
OPTICAL
Audio out
L
CD player
R
CD
MD/CD-R
IN
(PLAY)
MD
/CD-R
(REC)
L
R
AUDIO
MD/CD-R
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
O
O
R
L
R
L
Audio in
Audio out
Optical in
MD recorder or
tape deck
Optical out
English
17
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 18 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the antennas
Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the
designated terminals.
AM loop antenna
(included)
Indoor FM antenna
(included)
Notes
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an
outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest
authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor
antennas.
■ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter
(U.K. model only)
1
Open the cover of the
included 75-ohm/300-ohm
antenna adapter.
2
Cut the external sleeve
of the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and prepare it for
connection.
TUNER
AM
ANT
GND
75Ω UNBAL.
FM
ANT
(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)
Ground (GND terminal)
3
Cut the lead wire and
remove it.
4
Insert the cable
wire into the slot,
and clamp it with
pliers.
For maximum safety and minimum interference,
connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth
ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven
into moist earth.
■ Connecting the AM loop antenna
1
Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it
to the terminals on this unit.
11 (7/16)
8 (5/16)
6 (1/14)
Lead wire
Clamp
Insert wire into
slot.
5
2
Press and hold the tab to insert
the AM loop antenna lead wires
into the AM ANT and GND
terminals.
3
Orient the AM loop antenna
for the best reception.
18
Snap the cover
into place.
Unit:
mm (in.)
Clamp
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 19 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the power supply cord
■ Connecting the AC power cord
Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.
■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.K. and Australia models.............................. 1 OUTLET
Korea model............................................................... None
Other models.................................................. 2 OUTLETS
PREPARATION
Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your
other components to this unit. Power to the AC
OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON
(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). The outlet(s)
supply power to any connected component whenever this
unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power
consumption of components) that can be connected to the
AC OUTLET(S) is:
Korea model................................................................. N/A
Other models ........................................................... 100 W
■ Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from
being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC
wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one
week, the stored data will be lost.
English
19
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 20 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
CONNECTIONS
■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
CAUTION
Do not change the setting of the IMPEDANCE
SELECTOR switch when the unit power is switched on,
as doing so may damage the unit.
If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON is pressed
on either the front panel or remote control, the
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to
either position. If this is the case, slide the switch all the
way to either position when this unit is in standby mode.
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
Select the switch position (left or right) according to the
impedance of the speakers in your system.
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
Switch position
Speaker
Impedance level
If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be
4 Ω or higher.
Front
If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be
8 Ω or higher.
Left
Center, Surround, Surround back
The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.
If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be
8 Ω or higher.
Front
If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be
16 Ω or higher.*
Right
Center, Surround, Surround back
*
The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.
The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems (A and B) simultaneously when the switch is set to the right position.
20
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 21 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
CONNECTIONS
Turning on the power
When all connections are complete, turn on the power of
this unit.
(U.S.A. model)
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
PRESET/TUNING
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
l PRESET/TUNING h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
NEXT
EDIT
INPUT
PHONES
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
A
B
l
h
PROGRAM
VIDEO AUX
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
VIDEO
SILENT CINEMA
L
AUDIO
R
PREPARATION
1
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
SYSTEM
STANDBY
POWER
TV
AV
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
SLEEP
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
MULTI CH IN
1
AMP
VCR
1
POWER
POWER
TV VOL
TV CH
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
VOLUME
Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the
remote control) to turn on the power of this
unit.
SYSTEM
POWER
STANDBY
/ON
Front panel
2
or
Remote control
Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
English
21
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 22 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
BASIC SETUP
BASIC SETUP
The basic setup feature is a useful way to set up your
system quickly and with minimal effort.
3
Press SELECT to enter BASIC SETUP.
y
PRESET/CH
• If you wish to configure the unit manually using more precise
adjustments, use the detailed parameters in SOUND MENU
(page 46) instead of using BASIC SETUP.
• Altering any parameters in BASIC SETUP will reset all
parameters in SOUND MENU.
SELECT
Using the BASIC SETUP menu
Before you begin:
• Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel to select
the main speakers you want to use.
• Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this
unit.
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
1
2
3
4
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV THTR
MOVIE
5
6
7
8
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
9
0
The ROOM parameter appears in the front panel
display.
4
ROOM: S M >L
Select the size of the room you have installed your
speakers in. Roughly speaking, the room sizes are
defined as follows:
SYSTEM
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
CD
MD/CD-R
STANDBY
TUNER
POWER
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
MULTI CH IN
ENTER
EFFECT
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
DVD
10
SLEEP
TITLE
SET MENU
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
1
SELECT
AMP
VCR
TEST
RETURN
DISPLAY
2
3-13
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
S (small)
16 x 13ft, 200ft2 (4.8 x 4.0m, 20m2)
M (medium) 20 x 16ft, 300ft2 (6.3 x 5.0m, 30m2)
L (large)
26 x 19ft, 450ft2 (7.9 x 5.8m, 45m2)
REC
AUDIO
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS
TV MUTE
1
MODE
PTY SEEK START
EON
TV INPUT
[Other models]
S (small)
3.6 x 2.8m, 10m2
M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0m, 20m2
L (large)
6.3 x 5.0m, 30m2
Press AMP.
AMP
5
2
Press j / i to select the desired setting.
Press d to display the SUBWOOFER
parameter.
Press SET MENU.
“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.
PRESET/CH
SELECT
SET MENU
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
BASIC SETUP
6
Press j / i to select the desired setting.
SUBWOOFER YES
YES
NONE
22
If you have a subwoofer in your system.
If you do not have a subwoofer in your system.
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 23 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
BASIC SETUP
7
Press d to display the SPEAKERS
parameter.
11
Press SELECT to confirm your selection.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
SELECT
SELECT
Press j / i to select the number of speakers
you connected.
CHECK:TestTone
SPEAKERS 6spk
Choices
Display
2spk
L C R
SL SB SR
3spk
L C R
SL SB SR
4spk
L C R
SL SB SR
5spk
L C R
SL SB SR
6spk
L C R
SL SB SR
CHECK OK?
Speakers
YES
Front L/R
12
Press j / i to select the desired setting.
Front L/R, Center
CHECK OK?
YES
Front L/R, Surround L/R
YES
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R
NO
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,
Surround back
13
9
PREPARATION
8
If you selected SET, you hear a test tone from each
speaker in turn. “CHECK:Test Tone” appears in the
front panel display for a few seconds, then “CHECK:
OK?”.
Press d to display SET/CANCEL.
PRESET/CH
To complete the setup process if the test tone
levels from each speaker were satisfactory.
To proceed to the SP LEVEL speaker level
adjustment menu to balance the level of each
speaker.
Press SELECT to confirm your selection.
PRESET/CH
SELECT
SELECT
If you selected NO in step 12, the front speaker level
adjustment display appears in the front panel display.
10
Press j / i to select the desired setting.
>SET CANCEL
SET
CANCEL
To apply the settings you chose in steps
4 through 8.
To cancel the setup without making any
changes.
English
23
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 24 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
BASIC SETUP
■ To balance the speaker levels
Perform the following steps after step 13 (see page 23).
t
96
24
VCR
SILENT CINEMA
MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL
SP
AB
q DIGITAL
q EX
q PL
q PL
q PL x
PCM
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
SLEEP
MD/CD-R
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
PS
TUNER
CD
TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME
PTY RT CT
EON
FR-----||-----
dB
ft
mS
dB
96/24
L C R
LFE SL SB SR
The unit outputs the test tone from the selected speaker
and the left front (or left surround) speaker in turn. The
indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test tone
flashes in the front panel display.
1
Press d / u to select a speaker, then use j / i
to adjust the balance.
FR-----||----Adjusts the balance between the front left and right
speakers.
C-----||----Adjusts the balance between the front left and center
speakers.
SL-----||----Adjusts the balance between the front left and
surround left speakers.
SB-----||----Adjusts the balance between the surround left and
surround back speakers.
SR-----||----Adjusts the balance between the surround left and
surround right speakers.
SWFR-----||----Adjusts the balance between the front left speaker
and the subwoofer.
2
Press SET MENU to exit after balancing the
speakers.
y
You can also balance the speaker levels using test tone by
pressing TEST on the remote control.
24
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, if the power cord is disconnected from the
AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one
week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the
items again.
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 25 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
PLAYBACK
PLAYBACK
Basic operations
4
(U.S.A. model)
Select the input source.
Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons
on the remote control) to select the input you desire.
VOLUME
INPUT
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
SLEEP
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
MULTI CH IN
STANDBY
/ON
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
l PRESET/TUNING h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
NEXT
EDIT
or
INPUT
PHONES
l
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
A
B
PROGRAM
h
VIDEO AUX
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
VIDEO
SILENT CINEMA
L
AUDIO
AMP
VCR
R
Front panel
Remote control
1
3
1
CODE SET
4
6
TRANSMIT
SYSTEM
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
CD
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
STANDBY
POWER
TUNER
SLEEP
V-AUX
TV CH
TV VOL
TV CH
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
VOLUME
MULTI CH IN
6
VOLUME
t
96
24
q EX
q PL
VCR
SILENT CINEMA
MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL
SP
AB
q DIGITAL
MUTE
AMP
VCR
TV VOL
The current input source name and input mode appear
in the front panel display and video monitor for a few
seconds.
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
ROCK
1
2
3
4
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV THTR
MOVIE
5
6
7
8
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
9
0
10
ENTER
q PL
q PL x
PCM
7
V-AUX
SLEEP
10 DDVDD
Selected input source
EFFECT
DTV/CBL
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
MD/CD-R
TUNER
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
PS
CD
TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME
PTY RT CT
EON
AUTO00
dB
ft
mS
dB
96/24
L C R
LFE SL SB SR
Input mode
PRESET/CH
1
Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the
remote control) to turn on the power.
5
Start playback or select a broadcast station
on the source component.
Refer to the operating instructions for the component.
6
Adjust the volume to the desired output level.
BASIC
OPERATION
4
7
7
SYSTEM
POWER
STANDBY
/ON
or
Front panel
Remote control
2
Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
3
Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel.
Each press turns the respective speakers on or off.
VOLUME
or
Front panel
VOLUME
Remote control
SPEAKERS
B
A
English
25
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 26 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
PLAYBACK
7
Select a sound field program if desired.
Press PROGRAM l / h repeatedly (or press AMP
on the remote control to select the AMP mode, then
press one of the sound field program buttons
repeatedly) to select a sound field program. (See
page 39 for details about sound field programs.)
To adjust the tone
You can adjust the tonal quality
CONTROL
of your front left and right
speakers or headphones (when
connected).
Press CONTROL on the front
panel repeatedly to select
TREBLE or BASS, then press
BASS/TREBLE –/+ repeatedly to
increase or decrease.
• Select TREBLE to adjust the
high frequency response.
• Select BASS to adjust the low
frequency response.
To cancel the tone control, press CONTROL repeatedly to
select BYPASS.
BASS/TREBLE
l
PROGRAM
AMP
h
or
Front panel
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
1
2
3
4
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV THTR
MOVIE
5
6
7
8
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
9
0
10
ROCK
ENTER
EFFECT
Remote control
To listen with headphones (SILENT CINEMA)
“SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT
CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect
headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to
CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When
activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in
the front panel display.
Notes
• This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI
CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
• “SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when the Direct Stereo or
2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode.
26
y
Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.
Notes
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-frequency
sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround
speakers may not match that of the front left and right speakers.
• CONTROL is not effective with the Direct Stereo program
(page 30) or MULTI CH INPUT.
To mute the sound
Press MUTE on the remote control.
The MUTE indicator blinks in the
front panel display.
To resume the audio output, press
MUTE again (or press VOLUME –/+).
The MUTE indicator disappears from
the display.
y
You can adjust the muting level (see page 48).
MUTE
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 27 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
PLAYBACK
■ Selecting MULTI CH INPUT
Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT”
appears in the front panel display and video monitor.
MULTI CH
INPUT
Selecting sound field programs
■ Front panel operation
MULTI CH IN
(U.S.A. model)
or
VOLUME
Front panel
Remote control
STANDBY
/ON
PRESET/TUNING
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
l PRESET/TUNING h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
NEXT
EDIT
INPUT
PHONES
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
A
B
l
PROGRAM
h
VIDEO AUX
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
CONTROL
MULTI CH INPUT
BASS/TREBLE
VIDEO
SILENT CINEMA
L
AUDIO
R
Note
PROGRAM
When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display,
no other source can be played. To select another input source with
INPUT (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH
INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” in the front panel
display.
l
PROGRAM
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Playing video sources in the
background
Press PROGRAM l / h repeatedly to select the
desired program.
The name of the selected program appears in the front
panel display and video monitor.
h
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
Use the input selector buttons on the remote
control to select a video source, then select an
audio source.
t
96
24
VCR
SILENT CINEMA
MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL
SP
AB
q DIGITAL
q EX
q PL
q PL
q PL x
PCM
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
SLEEP
MD/CD-R
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
PS
TUNER
CD
TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME
PTY RT CT
EON
10 DJAZZACLUBO00
dB
ft
mS
dB
96/24
L C R
LFE SL SB SR
Program name
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
SLEEP
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
MULTI CH IN
Audio sources
VCR
AMP
Video sources
Note
If you want to enjoy audio from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
together with a video source, first select the video source, then
press MULTI CH INPUT.
English
27
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 28 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
PLAYBACK
■ Remote control operation
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
TV VOL
TV CH
■ Enjoying multi-channel software
If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature
to enjoy 6.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources
using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital Surround
EX or DTS-ES decoders.
VOLUME
SYSTEM
POWER
AMP
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
TV
AV
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
SLEEP
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
MULTI CH IN
TV INPUT
HALL
JAZZ
1
2
3
4
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV THTR
MOVIE
5
6
7
8
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
9
0
MUTE
AMP
VCR
TV MUTE
STEREO
ROCK
10
Sound field
program
buttons
ENTER
EFFECT
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
Press AMP on the remote control to select the
AMP mode, then press EX/ES to switch between
5.1 and 6.1-channel playback.
A/B/C/D/E
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
SELECT
EX/ES
AMP
10
Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press
one of the sound field program buttons
repeatedly to select the desired program.
The name of the selected program appears in the front
panel display.
To select a decoder, press j / i repeatedly while
PLIIxMusic (etc.) is displayed.
PRESET/CH
STEREO
AMP
HALL
JAZZ
ROCK
1
2
3
4
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV THTR
MOVIE
5
6
7
8
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
9
0
10
SELECT
ENTER
EFFECT
t
96
24
VCR
SILENT CINEMA
MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL
SP
AB
q DIGITAL
q EX
q PL
q PL
q PL x
PCM
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
SLEEP
MD/CD-R
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
PS
TUNER
CD
TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME
PTY RT CT
EON
10 DJAZZACLUBO00
dB
ft
mS
dB
96/24
L C R
LFE SL SB SR
Program name
y
Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.
Notes
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with that source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when MULTI CH
INPUT is selected.
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/
24 signals) will be sampled down to 48 kHz, then sound field
programs will be applied.
AUTO (AUTO)
When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is
input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing
back the signal in 6.1 channels.
If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in
the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1
channels.
Decoders (select with j / i)
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the format of the software you are playing.
PLIIxMusic
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1
channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder.
EX/ES
For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1 channels
using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder.
DTS signals are played back in 6.1 channels using the
DTS-ES decoder.
EX
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1
channels using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder.
OFF (OFF)
Decoders are not used to create 6.1 channels.
28
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 29 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
PLAYBACK
Notes
• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)
which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these
kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select a decoder manually
(PLIIx Music, EX/ES or EX).
• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EX/ES is pressed in
the following cases:
– When “SURR LR” (see page 46) or “SURR B” (see page 46)
is set to NONE.
– When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is
being played.
– When the source being played does not contain surround left
and right channel signals.
– When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
– When “2ch Stereo” or “Direct Stereo” is selected.
• When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be
reset to AUTO.
• When the DTS-ES decoder is applied to DTS 96/24 signals, you
cannot use the DTS 96/24 decoding feature.
• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SURR B” is
set to NONE (see page 46).
■ Enjoying 2-channel software
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back on multiple channels.
Press q/DTS on the remote control to select the
decoder.
q/DTS
9
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the type of software you are playing and your personal
preference.
PRO LOGIC SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.
PRO LOGIC SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround
sources.
BASIC
OPERATION
PRO LOGIC IIx Movie*
Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for movie software.
PRO LOGIC IIx Music*
Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for music software.
PRO LOGIC IIx Game*
Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for game software.
DTS Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie software.
DTS Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music software.
*
Use the PLII/PLIIx parameter to select the Pro Logic II or Pro
Logic IIx decoders (see page 40).
Note
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SURR B” is set
to NONE (see page 46).
English
29
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 30 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
PLAYBACK
■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound
(Direct Stereo)
Direct Stereo allows you to bypass this unit’s decoders and
DSP processors to enjoy pure high fidelity sound from 2channel PCM and analog sources.
Press PROGRAM l / h repeatedly (or press
AMP to select the AMP mode, then press
STEREO repeatedly) to select “Direct Stereo”.
l
h
PROGRAM
AMP
■ Night listening modes
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either
NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the
type of material you are playing.
Press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to
select cinema or music.
When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in
the front panel display lights up.
or
NIGHT
0
Front panel
Remote control
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
ROCK
1
2
3
4
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV THTR
MOVIE
5
6
7
8
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
9
0
10
ENTER
EFFECT
Remote control
Direct Stereo
• Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.
• Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources
to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
• Select OFF if you do not want to use this function.
Press j / i to adjust the effect level while
NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed.
This adjusts the level of compression.
Notes
• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in
this mode.
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input,
this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog
input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will
be heard.)
• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.
• CONTROL (page 26) and SET MENU (page 44) settings are
not effective.
• The front panel display automatically dims.
PRESET/CH
SELECT
Remote control
Effect.Lvl:MID
• Select MIN for minimum compression.
• Select MID for standard compression.
• Select MAX for maximum compression.
y
NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored
independently.
Notes
• You cannot use the night listening modes with the Direct Stereo
program or MULTI CH INPUT (even though the NIGHT
indicator lights up when Direct Stereo is selected).
• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending
on the input source and surround sound settings you use.
30
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 31 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
PLAYBACK
■ Downmixing to 2 channels
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback even from multichannel sources.
Press PROGRAM l / h repeatedly (or press
STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch
Stereo.
Selecting input modes
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the
following to select the type of input signals you want to
use.
1
l
PROGRAM
h
or
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
ROCK
1
2
3
4
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV THTR
MOVIE
5
6
7
8
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
9
0
10
Front panel
Rotate INPUT to select the input source.
INPUT
ENTER
EFFECT
Remote control
2
2ch Stereo
Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode.
In most cases, use AUTO.
INPUT MODE
y
■ Listening to unprocessed input signals
In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are
output from only the front left and right speakers. Multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate
channels without any additional effect processing.
t
96
24
q EX
q PL
q PL
q PL x
PCM
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select STRAIGHT.
or
Front panel
SLEEP
EFFECT
Remote control
DTS
ANALOG
STRAIGHT
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) again so that “STRAIGHT”
disappears from the display when you want to turn the
sound effect back on.
DTV/CBL
10 DDVDD
AUTO
ENTER
EFFECT
V-AUX
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
Input source
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHT
VCR
SILENT CINEMA
MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL
SP
AB
q DIGITAL
MD/CD-R
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
PS
TUNER
CD
TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME
PTY RT CT
EON
AUTO00
dB
ft
mS
dB
96/24
BASIC
OPERATION
You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or
BOTH is selected in “BASS OUT”.
L C R
LFE SL SB SR
Input mode
Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
1) Digital signals*
2) Analog signals
Selects only digital signals encoded in
DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no
sound is output.
Selects only analog signals. If no
analog signals are input, no sound is
output.
* If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the
decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound
field program.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
y
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
If you do not connect surround speakers, Virtual CINEMA
DSP activates automatically whenever you select a
CINEMA DSP sound field program.
You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the
power is turned on (see page 49).
Note
English
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when “SURR LR”
is set to NONE (see page 46) in the following cases:
– When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
– When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
31
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 32 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
PLAYBACK
Notes
3
• When you play DTS-encoded CD/LDs with the input mode set
to AUTO:
– This unit automatically switches to the DTS decoding mode.
The unit remains in DTS mode (and the t indicator may
flash) for up to 30 seconds after playback of the DTS source is
complete. To manually release the DTS mode, press INPUT
MODE to reselect AUTO.
– The DTS decoding mode may be released if search or skip
operations are performed for more than 30 seconds. To
prevent this, press INPUT MODE to select DTS.
• If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any
way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you
make a digital connection between this unit and the player.
Displaying the information about the input
source
Press u / d to display the following
information about the input signal.
PRESET/CH
SELECT
(Format)
in
You can display the type, format and sampling frequency
of the current input signal.
1
fs
Select the input source.
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
SLEEP
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
MULTI CH IN
AMP
VCR
2
Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then
press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) so that
“STRAIGHT” appears in the display.
STRAIGHT
AMP
then
ENTER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
32
rate
flg
Signal format display. When the unit
cannot detect a digital signal it
automatically switches to analog input.
Number of source channels in the input
signal. For example, a multi-channel
soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2
surround channels and LFE, is
displayed as “3/2/LFE”.
Sampling frequency. When the unit is
unable to detect the sampling
frequency “Unknown” appears.
Bit rate. When the unit is unable to
detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears.
Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby
Digital signals that cue this unit to
automatically switch decoders.
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 33 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
TUNING
TUNING
Automatic and manual tuning
3
There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the
front panel display.
AUTO
TUNING MODE
■ Automatic tuning
Lights up
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
(U.S.A. model)
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn the colon (:) off.
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
PRESET/TUNING
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
NEXT
EDIT
l PRESET/TUNING h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PRESET/TUNING
INPUT
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
VIDEO AUX
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EDIT
EFFECT
CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
VIDEO
SILENT CINEMA
4
AUDIO
R
1 3
VCR
T CINEMA
SP
TUAL
V-AUX
1
MD/CD-R
DVD
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
SLEEP
PS
TUNER
TUNED STEREO MEM
PTY RT CT
EON
1A -AAM11440kkHz
Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input
source.
4
INPUT
DTV/CBL
NIGHT ZONE2
AB
BASIC
OPERATION
3 2
L
Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin
automatic tuning.
Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l
to tune into a lower frequency.
l PRESET/TUNING h
Front panel
LEVEL
2
Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
VCR
T CINEMA
SP
TUAL
AB
FM/AM
FM
or
AM
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
SLEEP
MD/CD-R
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
PS
TUNER
TUNED STEREO MEM
PTY RT CT
EON
1A -AAM11530kkHz
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
lights up and the frequency of the received station is
shown in the front panel display.
English
33
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 34 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
TUNING
■ Manual tuning
If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,
tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station
will automatically switch the tuner to monaural reception
to increase the signal quality.
1
Select TUNER and the reception band
following steps 1 and 2 as described in
“Automatic tuning”.
2
Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the AUTO indicator disappears from
the front panel display.
Presetting stations
■ Automatically presetting FM stations
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations. This function enables this unit to
automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals,
and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through
E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.
(U.S.A. model)
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
PRESET/TUNING
AUTO
TUNING MODE
A/B/C/D/E
l PRESET/TUNING h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
NEXT
INPUT
l
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
A
B
PROGRAM
h
VIDEO AUX
INPUT MODE
Disappears
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
FM/AM
EDIT
PHONES
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
BASS/TREBLE
CONTROL
VIDEO
SILENT CINEMA
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn the colon (:) off.
1
1
PRESET/TUNING
L
AUDIO
R
3 2
Press FM/AM to select the FM band.
EDIT
FM/AM
VCR
T CINEMA
SP
TUAL
AB
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
SLEEP
MD/CD-R
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
PS
TUNER
TUNED STEREO MEM
PTY RT CT
EON
1A -AAM11440kkHz
3
FM
Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into
the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to
l PRESET/TUNING h
continue searching.
LEVEL
2
Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the
front panel display.
AUTO
TUNING MODE
Lights up
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn the colon (:) off.
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
VCR
T CINEMA
SP
TUAL
AB
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
SLEEP
MD/CD-R
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
PS
TUNER
TUNED STEREO MEM
PTY RT CT
EON
1A -AAM11440kkHz
34
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 35 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
TUNING
■ Manually presetting stations
3
Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
for more than 3 seconds.
The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO
indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic
presetting starts from the frequency currently
displayed and proceeds toward the higher
frequencies.
You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups)
manually.
(U.S.A. model)
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
PRESET/TUNING
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
l PRESET/TUNING h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
NEXT
EDIT
INPUT
PHONES
MEMORY
l
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
A
B
PROGRAM
h
VIDEO AUX
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
VIDEO
SILENT CINEMA
L
AUDIO
R
MAN'L/AUTO FM
34
t
96
24
VCR
SILENT CINEMA
MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL
SP
AB
q DIGITAL
q EX
q PL
q PL
q PL x
PCM
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
SLEEP
MD/CD-R
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
PS
TUNER
2,5
CD
TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME
PTY RT CT
EON
1A 1:FM187.5kMHz
dB
ft
mS
dB
96/24
L C R
1
LFE SL SB SR
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
t
VCR
96
24
SILENT CINEMA
MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL
SP
AB
q DIGITAL
q EX
q PL
q PL
q PL x
PCM
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
SLEEP
MD/CD-R
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
PS
TUNER
CD
TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME
PTY RT CT
EON
1A 1:AM18630kkHz
dB
ft
mS
dB
96/24
L C R
LFE SL SB SR
When tuned into a station, the front panel display
shows the frequency of the station received.
2
Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).
The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.
BASIC
OPERATION
Notes
• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
• If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after
searching all stations.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually
and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting
stations”.
Tune into a station.
See page 33 for tuning instructions.
MEMORY
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
Flashes
Automatic preset tuning options
You can select the preset number from which this unit will
store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower
frequencies.
After pressing MEMORY in step 3:
1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to
select the preset number under which the first station
will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when
stations have all been stored up to E8.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon
(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin
tuning toward the lower frequencies.
Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A to E) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)
appears in the front panel display.
A/B/C/D/E
NEXT
t
96
24
VCR
SILENT CINEMA
MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL
SP
AB
q DIGITAL
q EX
q PL
q PL
q PL x
PCM
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
SLEEP
MD/CD-R
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
PS
TUNER
CD
TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME
PTY RT CT
EON
1C 1:AM18630kkHz
dB
ft
mS
dB
96/24
L C R
LFE SL SB SR
Preset group
English
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If
so, store the stations again by using the presetting
station methods.
3
35
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 36 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
TUNING
4
Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a
preset station number (1 through 8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
Press h to select a higher preset station number.
Press l to select a lower preset station number.
Selecting preset stations
You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the
preset station number under which it was stored.
(U.S.A. model)
VOLUME
l PRESET/TUNING h
STANDBY
/ON
LEVEL
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
l PRESET/TUNING h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
NEXT
EDIT
INPUT
PHONES
l
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
A
B
h
PROGRAM
VIDEO AUX
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
VIDEO
SILENT CINEMA
t
96
24
q EX
q PL
VCR
SILENT CINEMA
MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL
SP
AB
q DIGITAL
q PL
q PL x
PCM
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
SLEEP
MD/CD-R
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
PS
TUNER
L
AUDIO
R
CD
TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME
PTY RT CT
EON
1C 3:AM18630kkHz
dB
ft
mS
dB
96/24
2
1
L C R
LFE SL SB SR
Preset number
q/DTS
NIGHT
9
0
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
10
ENTER
EFFECT
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
1
2
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
5
Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the
front panel while the MEMORY indicator is
flashing.
The station band and
MEMORY
frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset
group and number you have
selected.
MAN'L/AUTO FM
t
96
24
q EX
q PL
VCR
SILENT CINEMA
MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL
SP
AB
q DIGITAL
q PL
q PL x
PCM
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
SLEEP
MD/CD-R
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
PS
TUNER
SELECT
TEST
RETURN
AUDIO
When performing this operation with the remote
control, first press TUNER to set the remote to
tuner mode.
1
CD
TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME
PTY RT CT
EON
1C 3:AM18630kkHz
dB
ft
mS
dB
96/24
DISPLAY
REC
L C R
LFE SL SB SR
Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station
group.
The preset group letter appears in the front panel
display and changes each time you press the button.
Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.
SET MENU
A/B/C/D/E
or
6
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
NEXT
Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.
Front panel
Remote control
Notes
• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
2
Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET/CH
u / d on the remote control) to select a
preset station number (1 to 8).
The preset group and number appear in the front
panel display along with the station band, frequency
and the TUNED indicator lights up.
PRESET/CH
l PRESET/TUNING h
or
SELECT
LEVEL
Front panel
Remote control
VCR
SILENT CINEMA
SP
VIRTUAL
AB
x
36
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
SLEEP
MD/CD-R
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
PS
TUNER
CD
TUNED STEREO MEMORY M
PTY RT CT
EON
1E 1:FM187.5kMHz
ft
mS
dB
9
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 37 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
TUNING
Exchanging preset stations
4
You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.
Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.
The stations stored at the two preset assignments are
exchanged.
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
(U.S.A. model)
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
VCR
PRESET/TUNING
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
l PRESET/TUNING h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
NEXT
EDIT
SILENT CINEMA
SP
VIRTUAL
AB
INPUT
PHONES
l
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
A
B
h
PROGRAM
VIDEO AUX
INPUT MODE
x
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
VIDEO
SILENT CINEMA
2,4
1,3
L
AUDIO
R
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
SLEEP
MD/CD-R
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
PS
TUNER
CD
TUNED STEREO MEMORY M
PTY RT CT
EON
1E EDIT18E1-A5Hz
ft
mS
dB
9
1,3
Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations”.
2
Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for
more than 3 seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
BASIC
OPERATION
1
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
VCR
SILENT CINEMA
SP
VIRTUAL
x
3
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
AB
SLEEP
MD/CD-R
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
PS
TUNER
CD
TUNED STEREO MEMORY M
PTY RT CT
EON
1E 1:FM187.5kMHz
ft
mS
dB
9
Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
l PRESET/TUNING h
A/B/C/D/E
LEVEL
NEXT
VCR
SILENT CINEMA
SP
VIRTUAL
AB
x
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
SLEEP
MD/CD-R
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
PS
TUNER
CD
TUNED STEREO MEMORY M
PTY RT CT
EON
1A 5:FM190.6kMHz
ft
mS
dB
9
English
37
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 38 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
RECORDING
RECORDING
Recording adjustments and other operations are
performed from the recording components. Refer to the
operating instructions for those components.
(U.S.A. model)
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
l PRESET/TUNING h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
NEXT
EDIT
INPUT
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
VIDEO AUX
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
VIDEO
SILENT CINEMA
1
L
AUDIO
R
2
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
SYSTEM
2
STANDBY
POWER
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
SLEEP
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
MULTI CH IN
1
AMP
VCR
TV VOL
TV CH
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
VOLUME
1
Turn on the power of this unit and all
connected components.
2
Select the source component you want to
record from.
Notes
• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record
between other components connected to this unit.
• The setting of CONTROL, VOLUME, “SP LEVEL” (page 47)
and the sound field programs does not affect recorded material.
• A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit
cannot be recorded.
• [ HTR-5750 only ] S-Video and composite video signals pass
independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore,
when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source
component is connected to provide only an S-Video (or only a
composite video) signal, you can record only an S-Video (or
only a composite video) signal to your VCR.
• [ HTR-5750 ] Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT
jacks are not output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for
recording. Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN
(L/R) jacks are not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.
Therefore, if your source component is connnected to provide
only digital (or analog) signals, you can only record digital (or
analog) signals.
• [ HTR-5740 ] Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT
jacks are not output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for
recording. You can only record analog signals.
• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT
channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR IN is not
output on VCR OUT.)
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from
records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may
infringe copyright laws.
If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
INPUT
or
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
SLEEP
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
MULTI CH IN
VCR
Front panel
AMP
Remote control
3
Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.
4
Start recording on the recording component.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
38
■ Special considerations when recording
DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to
digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise
being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to
record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,
the following considerations and adjustments need to be
made.
For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player
is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operating
instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will
be output from the player.
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 39 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multichannel playback from
almost any sound source (stereo or multichannel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous
concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.
y
The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to
AUTO (see page 31) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.
Notes
• This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in
the actual hall, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.
• Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.
For movie/video sources
You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”
can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel
(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.
Program
Features
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channels (left and right) or plays back 2-channel
sources as is.
MUSIC VIDEO
This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling you are at
an actual jazz or rock concert.
ENTERTAINMENT:
Game
This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.
TV THEATER:
Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The
program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presernce
sound field.
TV THEATER:
Variety/Sports
Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the
sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching
various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs.
MOVIE THEATER:
Spectacle
CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm
movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the
sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby
Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).
MOVIE THEATER:
Sci-Fi
CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the
latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space
amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes
Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced
techniques.
MOVIE THEATER:
Adventure
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of
the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to
that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained
as much as possible.
MOVIE THEATER:
General
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and
multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field.
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
STEREO:
2ch Stereo
Sources
MULTI
2-CH
English
39
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 40 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
Program
Features
DOLBY DIGITAL:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 5.1-channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
DOLBY DIGITAL:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources.
DOLBY D EX:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1-channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
DOLBY D EX:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital
sources.
DTS:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 5.1-channel processing for DTS sources.
DTS 96/24:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 5.1-channel processing for 96-kHz/24-bit DTS sources.
DTS:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS and 96-kHz/24-bit DTS sources.
DTS+DOLBY EX:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.
DTS+DOLBY EX:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.
DTS ES Mtrx6.1:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1-channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS sources.
DTS ES Mtrx6.1:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS sources.
DTS ES Disc6.1:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1-channel processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources.
DTS ES Disc6.1:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources.
PRO LOGIC:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.
PRO LOGIC:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround sources.
PRO LOGIC IIx:
PLIIx Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.*
PRO LOGIC II:
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.*
PRO LOGIC IIx:
PLIIx Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.*
PRO LOGIC II:
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.*
DTS: Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie software.
* You can select either Pro Logic IIx or Pro
40
Logic II processing using the PLII/PLIIx parameter on page 58.
Sources
MULTI
2-CH
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 41 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
For music sources
You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.
Program
Features
CONCERT HALL
HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats.
Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full,
rich sound.
JAZZ CLUB
HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous
New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering
a real and vibrant sound.
ROCK CONCERT
HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this
program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left
of the hall.
ENTERTAINMENT:
Disco
HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the
heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by highenergy, “immediate” sound.
q D+PLIIx Music:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
q
D+PLIIx Music:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
DTS+PLIIx Music:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
DTS+PLIIx Music:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
STEREO:
2ch Stereo
2-channel (left and right) playback.
STEREO:
Direct Stereo
Use to output stereo sources to only the front left and right speakers without any processing.
STEREO:
6ch Stereo
Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.
PRO LOGIC IIx:
PLIIx Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.*
PRO LOGIC II:
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.*
DTS: Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music software.
Sources
MULTI
2-CH
MULTI
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
* You can select either Pro Logic IIx or Pro
2-CH
Logic II processing using the PLII/PLIIx parameter on page 58.
English
41
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 42 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
■ Canceling the sleep timer
Using the sleep timer
Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to the AC OUTLET(S).
SYSTEM
POWER
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
SLEEP
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
MULTI CH IN
2
AMP
VCR
TV VOL
TV CH
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
VOLUME
1
Select a source and start playback on the
source component.
2
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set
the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front
panel display changes as shown
below. The SLEEP indicator flashes
while switching the amount of time
for the sleep timer.
SLEEP 120min
SLEEP OFF
t
96
24
q EX
q PL
q PL
q PL x
PCM
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
SLEEP
SLEEP
SLEEP 90min
SLEEP 30min
VCR
SILENT CINEMA
MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL
SP
AB
q DIGITAL
SLEEP 60min
MD/CD-R
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
PS
TUNER
CD
TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME
PTY RT CT
EON
1E SLEEP8120minz
dB
ft
mS
dB
96/24
L C R
LFE SL SB SR
The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel
display, and the display returns to the selected sound
field program.
SLEEP indicator
t
96
24
q EX
q PL
VCR
SILENT CINEMA
MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL
SP
AB
q DIGITAL
q PL
q PL x
PCM
42
V-AUX
DTV/CBL
DVD
NIGHT ZONE2
SLEEP
MD/CD-R
PTY HOLD AUTO
HiFi DSP
SLEEP OFF
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front
panel) to set this unit to the standby mode.
TRANSMIT
STANDBY
SLEEP
y
■ Setting the sleep timer
CODE SET
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in
the front panel display.
After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the
SLEEP indicator goes off.
PS
TUNER
CD
TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME
PTY RT CT
EON
1E CONCERT2HALLz
dB
ft
mS
dB
96/24
L C R
LFE SL SB SR
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 43 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
Manually adjusting speaker levels
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
Please note that this operation will override the level
adjustments made in “BASIC SETUP” (page 22), “SP
LEVEL” (page 47) and “Using the test tone” (page 43).
AMP
VCR
TV VOL
TV CH
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
1
VOLUME
HALL
JAZZ
ROCK
1
2
3
4
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV THTR
MOVIE
5
6
7
8
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
9
0
10
You can use the test tone feature to manually balance your
speaker levels. Please note that this operation will override
the level adjustments made in “BASIC SETUP” (page 22),
“SP LEVEL” (page 47) and “Manually adjusting speaker
levels” (page 43). Use the test tone to set speaker levels so
that the volume from each speaker is identical when heard
from your listening position.
Note
You cannot activate the test tone if headphones are connected to
the PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES
jack.
MUTE
STEREO
Using the test tone
AMP
VCR
ENTER
EFFECT
2
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
TITLE
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
4
TEST
RETURN
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
1
2
3
4
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV THTR
MOVIE
5
6
7
8
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
9
0
DISPLAY
REC
AUDIO
1
1
SET MENU
MUTE
3
Press AMP.
10
ROCK
ENTER
EFFECT
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
TITLE
SET MENU
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
2
2,5
Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the
speaker you want to adjust.
FRONT L
CENTER
FRONT R
SUR.R
SUR.B
SUR.L
SWFR
Front left speaker level
Center speaker level
Front right speaker level
Surround right speaker level
Surround back speaker level
Surround left speaker level
Subwoofer level
y
AUDIO
4
Press SELECT when you have completed
your adjustment.
3,4
1
Press AMP.
2
Press TEST.
The unit outputs a test tone.
3
Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker
you want to adjust.
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST
TEST
LEFT
CENTER
RIGHT
SUR.R
SUR.B
SUR.L
SUBWOOFER
Front left speaker
Center speaker
Front right speaker
Right surround speaker
Surround back speaker
Left surround speaker
Subwoofer
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.
The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB.
DISPLAY
REC
Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by
pressing u / d.
3
TEST
RETURN
y
4
Press j / i to adjust speaker volumes.
This operation can also be performed using the controls on the
front panel. Press NEXT repeatedly to select the speaker you
want to adjust, then press LEVEL –/+ to adjust the output level.
5
Press TEST when you have completed your
adjustment.
The test tone stops.
English
43
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 44 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
SET MENU
SET MENU
You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
■ BASIC SETUP
Use to quickly setup basic system parameters (see page 22).
■ MANUAL SETUP
Use to adjust speaker and system settings.
1 SOUND MENU
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for
video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.
y
Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you perform “BASIC SETUP” (see page 22). You can
use SOUND MENU to make further adjustments.
Item
Features
Page
A)SPEAKER SET
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over
frequency.
46
B)SP LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
47
C)SP DISTANCE
Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.
47
D)CENTER GEQ
Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.
47
E)LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
47
F)D. RANGE
Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
47
G)AUDIO SET
Customizes the muting level and audio delay.
48
2 INPUT MENU
Use to reassign digital input/outputs and select the input mode.
Item
Features
Page
A)I/O ASSIGN
Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.
48
B)INPUT MODE
Selects the initial input mode of the source.
49
3 OPTION MENU
Use to adjust the optional system parameters.
Item
Features
Page
A)DISPLAY SET
Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals.
49
B)MEMORY GUARD
Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings.
49
C)PARAM. INI
Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.
50
D)ZONE SET
Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
50
44
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 45 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
SET MENU
Using SET MENU
6
Press SELECT to enter the displayed menu.
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to navigate to and enter the items
you want to adjust.
To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN.
1
7
Press u / d to select the item you want to
adjust, then press j / i to change the setting
of the item.
Repeat this operation to select and adjust each setting.
To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN.
2,8
8
To exit, press SET MENU when finished.
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
AMP
VCR
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
1
2
3
4
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV THTR
MOVIE
5
6
7
8
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
9
0
MUTE
10
ROCK
ENTER
EFFECT
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
TITLE
SET MENU
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
TEST
RETURN
DISPLAY
REC
AUDIO
3-7
y
You can change SET MENU parameters while the unit is
reproducing sound.
Note
You cannot change some SET MENU parameters while the unit
is in either cinema or music night listening mode.
1
Press AMP.
2
Press SET MENU.
“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.
3
Press u / d to display MANUAL SETUP.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, if the power cord is disconnected from the
AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one
week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the
items again.
MANUAL SETUP
Press SELECT to enter MANUAL SETUP.
1 SOUND MENU appears in the front panel display.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
4
1 SOUND MENU
5
Press u / d to display the desired menu.
1 SOUND MENU
2 INPUT MENU
3 OPTION MENU
English
45
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 46 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
SET MENU
1 SOUND MENU
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate
for video signal processing delays when using LCD
monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU
parameters are set automatically when you perform
“BASIC SETUP” (see page 22).
■ Speaker set A)SPEAKER SET
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.
y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.
Center speaker CENTER
Choices: LRG, SML, NONE
• Select LRG if you have a large center speaker. The unit
directs the entire range of the center channel signal to
the center speaker.
• Select SML if you have a small center speaker. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center
channel to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”.
• Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The
unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front
left and right speakers.
Front speakers FRONT
Choices: LARGE, SMALL
• Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The
unit directs the entire range of the front left and right
channel signals to the front left and right speakers.
• Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front
channel to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”.
Surround left/right speakers SURR LR
Choices: LRG, SML, NONE
• Select LRG if you have large surround left and right
speakers. The entire range of the surround channel
signal is directed to the surround left and right
speakers.
• Select SML if you have small surround left and right
speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround
channel are directed to the speakers selected with
“BASS OUT”.
• Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers.
This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP
mode (see page 31) and automatically set the surround
back speaker setting (SURR B) to NONE.
46
Surround back speaker SURR B
Choices: LRG, SML, NONE
• Select LRG if you have a large surround back speaker.
• Select SML if you have a small surround back speaker.
The low-frequency signals of the surround back
channel are directed to the speakers selected with
“BASS OUT”, and the rest of the frequency signals are
directed to the surround back speaker.
• Select NONE if you do not have a surround back
speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back
channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.
Bass out BASS OUT
Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the
subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers
according to the characteristics of your system. This
setting also determines the routing of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS
sources.
Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRONT, BOTH
• Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and
low-frequency signals from other channels are directed
to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings.
• Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and
low-frequency signals from other channels are directed
to the front speakers according to the speaker settings
(even if you have previously set the front speakers to
SMALL).
• Select BOTH if you connect a subwoofer and you want
to output low-frequency signals from front channels to
both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and lowfrequency signals from other channels are also directed
to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use
this function to reinforce low-frequency signals using
the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs.
Cross over CrossOver
Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency
for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the
selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer.
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
Subwoofer phase SWFR PHASE
If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to
switch the phase of your subwoofer.
Choices: NRM (normal), REV (reverse)
• Select NRM if you do not want to reverse the phase of
your subwoofer.
• Select REV to reverse the phase of your subwoofer.
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 47 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
SET MENU
■ Speaker level B)SP LEVEL
Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left or surround left speakers and each
speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 46).
Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
• FR adjusts the balance of the front left and front right
speakers.
• C adjusts the balance of the front left and center
speakers.
• SL adjusts the balance of the front left and surround
left speakers.
• SB adjusts the balance of the surround left and
surround back speakers.
• SR adjusts the balance of the surround left and
surround right speakers.
• SWFR adjusts the balance of the front left speaker and
subwoofer.
y
To calibrate, use the test tone feature (see page 43).
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually input the distance of each
speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time.
Unit UNIT
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)
Initial setting:
U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft)
Other models: meters (m)
• Select meters to input speaker distances in meters.
• Select feet to input speaker distances in feet.
■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL
Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency
effect) channel according to the capacity of your
subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries lowfrequency special effects which are only added to certain
scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Choices: –20 to 0 dB
Speaker SP LFE
Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.
Headphone HP LFE
Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.
Note
Depending on the “LFE LEVEL” setting, some signals may not
be output from the SUB WOOFER OUTPUT jack.
■ Dynamic range F)D. RANGE
Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to
be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is
effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and
DTS signals.
Choices: MAX (maximum), STD (standard), MIN
(minimum)
Speaker SP D.R
Select to adjust the speaker compression.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Speaker distances
Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft)
• FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.
Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker.
Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• SURR L adjusts the distance of the surround left
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• SURR R adjusts the distance of the surround right
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• SURR B adjusts the distance of the surround back
speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)
• SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial
setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ
Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic
equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of
the center speaker matches that of the left and right main
speakers. You can make adjustments listening to the
currently selected source component or a test tone.
You can adjust 5 frequency bands:
100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz, 10kHz
Choices: –6 to +6 dB
• Select ON to output test tones from the front left and
center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the
center speaker.
• Select OFF to stop the test tone and output the
currently selected source component.
Headphone HP D.R
Select to adjust the headphone compression.
• Select MAX for feature films.
• Select STD for general use.
• Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume
levels.
English
47
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 48 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
SET MENU
■ Audio set G)AUDIO SET
Use to customize this units overall audio settings.
Audio mute A.MUTE
Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the
output volume.
Choices: MUTE, –20 dB
• Select MUTE to completely halt all output of sound.
• Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Audio delay A.DELAY
Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the
video image. This may be necessary when using certain
LCD monitors or projectors.
Choices: 0 to 160 mS
2 INPUT MENU
Use to reassign digital input/outputs and select the input
mode.
■ Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGN
You can assign jacks according to the component to be
used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your
needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the
respective jacks and effectively connect more components.
Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the
corresponding component by using INPUT on the front
panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control.
For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A (C.V[A]) and B
(C.V[B])
Choices: DVD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR
[ HTR-5750 ]
For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 (OUT(1))
Choices: MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVD
For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2 (IN(2)), 3 (IN(3))
and 4 (IN(4))
Choices: CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVD,
MD/CD-R
For COAXIAL INPUT jack 5 (IN(5))
Choices: CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVD,
MD/CD-R
[ HTR-5740 ]
For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 1 (IN(1)) and
2 (IN(2))
Choices: CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVD,
MD/CD-R
For COAXIAL INPUT jack 3 (IN(3))
Choices: CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVD,
MD/CD-R
Notes
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the
COAXIAL jack.
48
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 49 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
SET MENU
■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE
Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources
connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on
this unit (see page 31 for details about the input mode).
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect
the type of input signal and select the appropriate input
mode.
• Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the
last input mode used for that source.
Note
Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EX/ES button
will not be recalled.
3 OPTION MENU
Use to adjust the optional system parameters.
■ Display set A)DISPLAY SET
Dimmer DIMMER
Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.
Choices: –4 to 0
Video conversion (HTR-5750 only) V CONV.
Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite
(VIDEO) signals to S-Video signals. This allows you to
output converted video signals from the S VIDEO jacks
when no S-Video signals are input.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select OFF not to convert any signals.
• Select ON to convert composite signals to S-Video
signals.
Note
Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT
jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video
connections (i.e., S-Video) between each component.
■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: ON, OFF
Select ON to protect:
• DSP program parameters
• All SET MENU items
• All speaker levels
When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use
the test tone or select any other SET MENU items.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
49
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 50 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
SET MENU
■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI
Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound
field program within a sound field program group. When
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
settings.
Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound field
program that you want to initialize.
An asterisk (*) next to a program number means that the
parameter values have been changed from their initial
settings.
Notes
• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter
settings once you initialize a sound field program group.
• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field
programs.
• You cannot initialize any program groups when “MEMORY
GUARD” is set to ON.
■ Zone set D)ZONE SET
Use to specify the location of speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals.
Speaker B set SP B
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
Choices: FRONT, ZONE B
• Select FRONT to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B
when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B
terminals are set in the main room.
• Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If
SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is
turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in
the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound
from SPEAKERS B only.
Notes
• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit
when “SP B” is set to ZONE B, the sound is output from both
headphones and SPEAKERS B.
• If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to ZONE B,
the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.
50
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 51 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and
other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up remote control with the appropriate manufacturer
codes.
Control area
■ Controlling this unit
■ Controlling other components
The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit
when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to activate
the AMP mode.
The shaded areas below can be used to control other
components. Each button has a different function
depending on the selected components. Select the
component you want to control by pressing an input
selector button.
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
SYSTEM
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
CD
MD/CD-R
DVD
DTV/CBL
STANDBY
POWER
TUNER
SLEEP
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
AMP
VCR
TV VOL
TV CH
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
STEREO
HALL
VOLUME
The buttons in the
dotted lines
(SYSTEM
POWER,
STANDBY,
SLEEP, MULTI CH
IN, VOLUME +/–
and MUTE)
function in any
mode.
MUTE
JAZZ
ROCK
1
2
3
4
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV THTR
MOVIE
5
6
7
8
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
9
0
10
CODE SET
/
buttons and the
input selector buttons switch
the function of the
component control area
below.
* Use the /
buttons to
control other components
regardless of whether they
are connected to this unit.
Press AMP to
control this unit.
TITLE
ENTER
SET MENU
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
TEST
RETURN
DISPLAY
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS
MODE
PTY SEEK START
EON
SYSTEM
STANDBY
POWER
MD/CD-R
TUNER
SLEEP
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
MULTI CH IN
POWER
TV
AV
CD
DVD
AMP
VCR
VOLUME
TVTV
VOL
TVTV
CHCH
VOL
TV
VOL
TVTV
CHCH
TV
VOL
TV
VOL
TVTV
CHCH
TV
VOL
TV
VOL
TVTV
CHCH
TV
VOL
TV
VOL
TVTV
CHCH
TV
VOL
TV VOL
TV CH
TVTV
MUTE
TVTV
INPUT
MUTE
INPUT
TV
MUTE
TV
INPUT
TV
MUTE
TV
INPUT
MUTE
TV
MUTE
TV
INPUT
TV
MUTE
TV
INPUT
TV
MUTE
TV
INPUT
TV
MUTE
TV
INPUT
TV
MUTE
TV
INPUT
TV
MUTE
TV
INPUT
TV
MUTE
TV
INPUT
EFFECT
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
TRANSMIT
POWER
Component control
area
You can control up to 9
different components by
setting appropriate
manufacturer codes (see
page 52).
FREQ/RDS
MODE
PTY SEEK START
ADVANCED
OPERATION
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
ROCK
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
ROCK
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
ROCK
HALL 3 JAZZ
JAZZ 4 ROCK
1STEREO
22HALL
ROCK
1STEREO
44ROCK
HALL 33 JAZZ
ROCK
1STEREO
22HALL
JAZZ
1STEREO
33JAZZ
HALL
JAZZ 44 ROCK
1STEREO
22HALL
STEREO
HALL
ROCK
1STEREO
3
4 ROCK
HALL 3 JAZZ
11STEREOTV
22
33JAZZ 444ROCK
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
THTR
MOVIE
1
2
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV
THTR
MOVIE
11
2
33
44
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV
THTR
MOVIE
2
ENTERTAIN
TV
THTR
MOVIE
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV
THTR
MOVIE
55MUSIC
6
7
8
ENTERTAIN
THTR
66
77TVTV
88 MOVIE
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
THTR
MOVIE
55MUSIC
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV
THTR
MOVIE
6
7
8
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV
THTR
MOVIE
55 MUSIC66ENTERTAIN
77 TV THTR
88 MOVIE
ENTERTAIN
55 MUSIC EX/ES
66
77TV THTR
88 MOVIE
q/DTS
NIGHT
55
66 STRAIGHT
77
88
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
5
6
7
8
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHT
ENTER
99 q/DTS
00 NIGHT
10 EX/ES
q/DTS
STRAIGHT
ENTER
q/DTS
NIGHT10
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
ENTER
99
00NIGHT
10EX/ES
q/DTS
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
ENTER
q/DTS
NIGHT10
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
ENTER
99
0 NIGHT
10
q/DTS
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
ENTER
10
EFFECT
q/DTS00 NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
ENTER
99
EFFECT
ENTER
00NIGHT 10
10
EFFECT
ENTER
99
10
EFFECT
ENTER
00
10
EFFECT
PRESET/CH
ENTER
9
10
EFFECT
LEVEL
SET
MENU
PRESET/CH
EFFECT
LEVEL
SET
MENU
PRESET/CH
EFFECT
LEVEL
SET
MENU
PRESET/CH
EFFECT
LEVEL
SET
MENU
PRESET/CH
EFFECT
LEVEL
SET
MENU
TITLE
MENU
PRESET/CH
EFFECT
LEVEL
SET
MENU
TITLE
MENU
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
SET
MENU
TITLE
MENU
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
SET
MENU
TITLE
MENU
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
SET
MENU
TITLE
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
SET
MENU
TITLE
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
SET
MENU
TITLE
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
TITLE
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
TITLE
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
TITLE
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
TITLE
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
TEST
SELECT
TEST
SELECT
TEST
SELECT
TEST
SELECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TEST
SELECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TEST
RETURN
DISPLAY
TEST
RETURN
DISPLAY
TEST
RETURN
DISPLAY
TEST
RETURN
DISPLAY
TEST
RETURN
DISPLAY
TEST
RETURN
DISPLAY
REC
RETURN
DISPLAY
REC
RETURN
DISPLAY
REC
RETURN
DISPLAY
REC
AUDIO
REC
AUDIO
REC
AUDIO
REC
AUDIO
REC
AUDIO
REC
DISC
SKIP
AUDIO
REC
DISC
SKIP
AUDIO
REC
DISC
SKIP
AUDIO
DISC
SKIP
AUDIO
DISC
SKIP
AUDIO
DISC
SKIP
AUDIO
DISC
SKIP
DISC
SKIP
DISC
SKIP
DISC
SKIP
EON
MODE
PTY
SEEK START
FREQ/RDS
DISC
SKIP
EON
English
51
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 52 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Setting manufacturer codes
1
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate manufacturer codes. Codes can be set up for
each input area. For a complete list of available
manufacturer codes, refer to “LIST OF
MANUFACTURER CODES” at the end of this manual.
Press an input selector button or /
to
select the component you want to set up.
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
SLEEP
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
MULTI CH IN
AMP
VCR
The following table shows the factory preset component
(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code
for each area.
Input
area
2
Component
category
(Library)
Manufacturer
Code
CD
CD
YAMAHA
0005
MD/CD-R
MD
YAMAHA
0024
TUNER
TUNER
YAMAHA
0003
DVD
DVD
YAMAHA
0098
DTV/CBL
–
–
–
V-AUX
–
–
–
VCR
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
3
Press the numeric buttons to enter the four
digit manufacturer’s code for the component
to be used.
Refer to “LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES” at
the end of this manual.
Note
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even
if a YAMAHA manufacturer code is initially set as listed above.
In this case, try to set other YAMAHA manufacturer code(s).
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
1
2
3
ROCK
4
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV THTR
MOVIE
5
6
7
8
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
9
0
10
ENTER
EFFECT
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
Notes
• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,
try each of them until you find the correct one.
• If you wait for more than 30 seconds during step 3, the setup
process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2.
52
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 53 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Controlling other components
Once you set the appropriate manufacturer codes, you can
use this remote to control your other components. Note
that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected
component. Use the input selector buttons to select the
component you want to operate. The remote control
automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for
that component.
1
2
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
1
2
3
4
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV THTR
MOVIE
5
6
7
8
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
9
0
SYSTEM
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
CD
DVD
MD/CD-R
DTV/CBL
POWER
STANDBY
TUNER
7
SLEEP
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX
ROCK
10
ENTER
B
EFFECT
8
9
0
AMP
VCR
3
4
TV VOL
TV CH
VOLUME
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
C
SELECT
TEST
RETURN
DISPLAY
D
REC
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
A
TV INPUT
MUTE
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
ROCK
1
2
3
4
DISC SKIP
FREQ/RDS
MODE
PTY SEEK START
EON
DVD player/
DVD recorder
VCR
Digital TV/
Cable TV
CD player
MD/CD recorder
Tuner
AV POWER
Power *1
Power *1
VCR power *3
Power *1
Power *1
Power *1
TV POWER
TV power *2
TV power *2
TV power
TV power *2
TV power *2
TV power *2
TV CH +
TV channel up *2
TV channel up *2
TV channel up
TV channel up *2
TV channel up *2
TV channel up *2
TV CH –
TV channel down *2
TV channel down *2
TV channel down
TV channel down *2
TV channel down *2
TV channel down *2
TV VOL +
TV volume up *2
TV volume up *2
TV volume up
TV volume up *2
TV volume up *2
TV volume up *2
TV VOL –
TV volume down *2
TV volume down *2
TV volume down
TV volume down *2
TV volume down *2
TV volume down *2
TV MUTE
TV mute *2
TV mute *2
TV mute
TV mute *2
TV mute *2
TV mute *2
TV INPUT
TV input *2
TV input *2
TV input
TV input *2
TV input *2
TV input *2
1-9, 0, +10
Numeric buttons
Numeric buttons
Numeric buttons
Numeric buttons
Numeric buttons
Preset stations (1-8)
TITLE
Title
PRESET/CH u Up
VCR channel up
Preset up
PRESET/CH d Down
VCR channel down
Preset down
PRESET/CH j
Right
PRESET/CH i
Left
RETURN
Return
REC/DISC
SKIP
Disc skip (player)
Rec (recorder)
Rec
VCR rec *3
p
Play
Play
VCR play *3
Play
Play
w
Search backward
Search backward
VCR search
backward *3
Search backward
Search backward
f
Search forward
Search forward
VCR search forward *3 Search forward
Search forward
AUDIO
Audio
e
Pause
Pause
VCR pause *3
Pause
b
Skip backward
Skip backward
Skip backward
a
Skip forward
Skip forward
Skip forward
s
Stop
Stop
VCR stop *3
Stop
Stop
ENTER
Title/Index
Enter
Enter
Index
Index
MENU
Menu
DISPLAY
Display
Display
Display
Display
Rec (MD)
Pause
ADVANCED
OPERATION
B
C
D
TV MUTE
AUDIO
A/B/C/D/E
*1
This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.
These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in DTV/CBL or
.
When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in both the DTV/CBL and
areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/
CBL area.
*3 These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR if the manufacturer code is set in VCR.
*2
English
53
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 54 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Clearing setup manufacturer codes
■ Clearing a setup manufacturer code for
component control
1
Press an input selector button or /
to
select the component control for which you
want to clear the manufacturer code.
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
SLEEP
DVD
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
MULTI CH IN
VCR
2
AMP
Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
3
If you do not press any button within 30
seconds after step 2, the clearing process is
canceled. If this happens, start over from
step 1.
4
Enter the code number “0000”.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the manufacturer code for the
selected component is cleared.
y
You can clear all setup manufacturer codes at once by entering the
code number “9990”.
54
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 55 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
What is a sound field
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections
enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
Changing parameter settings
You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset
parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial
settings, you can change some of the parameters to better
suit the input source or your listening room.
MUTE
CODE SET
■ Elements of a sound field
TRANSMIT
SYSTEM
In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming
straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are
two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to
make up the sound field:
1
STANDBY
POWER
MD/CD-R
TUNER
SLEEP
DTV/CBL
V-AUX
MULTI CH IN
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
CD
DVD
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
1
2
3
4
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV THTR
MOVIE
5
6
7
8
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
9
0
10
ROCK
2
ENTER
EFFECT
AMP
VCR
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
TEST
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
– 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall.
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen
the clarity of the direct sound.
TV CH
TV INPUT
VOLUME
RETURN
DISPLAY
REC
AUDIO
3,4
DISC SKIP
1
Press AMP.
2
Select the sound field program you want to
adjust.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberation taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a
concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at
all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly
what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field
processor.
TV VOL
TV MUTE
AMP
STEREO
HALL
JAZZ
ROCK
1
2
3
4
MUSIC
ENTERTAIN
TV THTR
MOVIE
5
6
7
8
q/DTS
NIGHT
EX/ES
STRAIGHT
9
0
10
ENTER
EFFECT
3
Press u / d to select
the parameters.
PRESET/CH
SELECT
4
Press j / i to change
the parameter value.
PRESET/CH
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
SELECT
English
55
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 56 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
5
Repeat steps 2 through 4 as necessary to
change other program parameters.
Note
You cannot change parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD”
is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set
“MEMORY GUARD” to OFF (see page 49).
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the parameter values will return to the
factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter
value again.
■ Resetting parameters to the factory
presets
To reset a certain parameter
Select the parameter you want to reset, then press j / i
repeatedly to select the factory preset (the display pauses
momentarily at the factory preset before proceeding to the
next value).
To reset all parameters
Use PARAM. INI (see page 50).
56
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 57 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
■ DSP LEVEL
Function:
Description:
Control range:
This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.
Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP
effect level relative to the level of the direct sound.
–6 dB – +3 dB
■ DELAY (Delay)
Function:
Description:
Control range:
This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the
direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.
The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther
it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value.
1 – 99 msec
Source Sound
Time
Time
Time
DELAY
Level
Level
Level
Early
Reflections
DELAY
DELAY
Sound Source
Reflection Face
Small value = 1 ms
Large value = 99 ms
For 6ch Stereo
Function:
These parameter adjusts the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.
Control Range: 0 – 100%
■ CT LEVEL (Center level)
■ SL LEVEL (Surround left level)
■ SR LEVEL (Surround right level)
■ SB LEVEL (Surround back level)
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
57
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 58 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
For PRO LOGIC IIx Music and PRO LOGIC II Music
■ PANORAMA
Function:
Choices:
Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect.
OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF.
■ DIMENSION
Function:
Control range:
Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.
–3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard).
■ CT WIDTH (Center width)
Function:
Control range:
Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the
center image towards the front left and right speakers.
0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only
from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3.
For PRO LOGIC IIx Movie, Music and Game
■ PLII/PLIIx (Pro Logic II/Pro Logic IIx)
Function:
Choices:
Switches the type of Pro Logic decoding to be used. PLII decoding creates 5.1-channel sound from
2-channel sources. PLIIx decoding creates 6.1-channel sound from 2-channel sources.
PLII, PLIIx
For DTS Neo:6 Music
■ C. IMAGE (Center image)
Function:
Control range:
58
This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.
0 – 0.5
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 59 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the
nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
■ General
Problem
This unit fails to turn
on when STANDBY/
ON (or SYSTEM
POWER) is pressed,
or enters in the
standby mode soon
after the power has
been turned on.
No sound
No picture
Cause
Remedy
Refer to
page
The power cord is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cord firmly.
—
The impedance setting is incorrect.
Set the impedance to match your speakers.
20
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit
and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for
each connection does not touch anything other than
its respective connection.
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
and strong static electricity).
Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the
power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use
it normally.
—
Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
14-17
The input mode is set to DTS or
ANALOG.
Select AUTO.
31
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with INPUT,
MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons.
25
Speaker connections are not secure.
Secure the connections.
11
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or
B.
25
The volume is turned down.
Turn up the volume.
—
The sound is muted.
Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
26
The input mode is set to ANALOG while
playing a source encoded with a DTS
signal.
Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS.
31
The signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being received from a source component
e.g.: a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.
—
The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Turn on the video conversion function (HTR-5750
only).
49
11-12
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
59
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 60 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
The sound suddenly
goes off.
Cause
Remedy
Refer to
page
Check that the impedance selector setting is correct.
20
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned the unit off.
Turn on the power, and play the source again.
—
The sound is muted.
Press MUTE to cancel a mute.
26
Only the speaker on
one side can be
heard.
Incorrect cable connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
11
Incorrect balance settings in SET MENU.
Adjust the SP LEVEL settings.
47
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound from the
effect speakers.
The sound field programs are turned off.
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn them on.
31
You are using a source or program
combination that does not output sound
from all channels.
Try another sound field program.
The output level of the center speaker is
set to minimum.
Raise the level of the center speaker.
47
“CENTER” in SET MENU is set to
NONE.
Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker.
46
One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (except
for 6ch Stereo) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
The output level of the surround speakers
is set to minimum.
Raise the output level of the surround speakers.
47
“SURR LR” in SET MENU is set to
NONE.
Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and
right speakers.
46
A monaural source is being played with
STRAIGHT.
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn on the sound
fields.
—
“SURR LR” in SET MENU is set to
NONE.
If the surround left and right speakers are set to
NONE, the surround back speaker setting is
automatically set to NONE. Select the appropriate
setting for the surround speakers.
46
“SURR B” in SET MENU is set to
NONE.
Select LRG or SML.
46
“BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set to
FRONT when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being played.
Select SWFR or BOTH.
46
“BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set to
SWFR or FRNT when a 2-channel source
is being played.
Select BOTH.
46
No sound from the
center speaker.
No sound from the
surround speakers.
No sound from the
surround back
speaker.
No sound from the
subwoofer.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
The source does not contain low bass
signals.
60
27, 39
27, 39
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 61 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
Cause
Remedy
Refer to
page
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operations
instructions for your component.
—
The input mode is set to ANALOG.
Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS.
31
A “humming” sound
can be heard.
Incorrect cable connections.
Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the OUT
(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power to the component.
—
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
[ HTR-5750 ]
The source component is not connected to
this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to this
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.
13-17, 38
13-17, 38
Some components cannot record the
Dolby Digital or DTS sources.
The source component is not connected to
this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings on this
unit cannot be
changed.
“MEMORY GUARD” in SET MENU is
set to ON.
Select OFF.
49
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and
then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
—
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short circuited.
Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
11
There is noise
interference from
digital or highfrequency equipment,
or this unit.
This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
turns into the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT jacks.
English
61
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 62 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Tuner
Problem
Cause
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
FM
AM
Remedy
Refer
to page
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
18
Use the manual tuning method.
34
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multipath interference.
Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multipath interference.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is too weak.
Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
18
Use the manual tuning method.
34
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned in.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Preset the stations again.
34
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for best reception.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
34
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
—
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby.
Move this unit away from the TV.
—
■ Remote control
Problem
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Cause
Refer to
page
Wrong distance or angle.
The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel.
7
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak.
Replace all batteries.
3
The manufacturer code was not correctly
set.
Set the manufacturer code correctly using the “LIST
OF MANUFACTURER CODES” at the end of this
manual.
52
Try to set another code for the same manufacturer
using the “LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES” at
the end of this manual.
52
Even if the manufacturer code is correctly
set, there are some models that do not
respond to the remote control.
62
Remedy
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 63 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS
RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS
If you want to reset all of your unit’s parameters for any
reason, do the following. This procedure completely resets
ALL parameters, including the SET MENU, level, assign
and tuner presets.
Be sure this unit is in standby mode.
(U.S.A. model)
VOLUME
STANDBY
/ON
PRESET/TUNING
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
NEXT
EDIT
l PRESET/TUNING h
MEMORY
TUNING MODE
LEVEL
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
INPUT
PHONES
SPEAKERS
A
B
STRAIGHT
l
PROGRAM
h
VIDEO AUX
INPUT MODE
MULTI CH
INPUT
EFFECT
CONTROL
BASS/TREBLE
VIDEO
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY/ON
1
L
AUDIO
R
STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Hold down STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel and press STANDBY/ON.
“FACTORY PRESET” appears in the front panel
display.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure without making any
changes, press STANDBY/ON.
2
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select the
desired setting.
Reset
Cancel
3
To reset the unit to its factory presets.
To cancel without making any changes.
Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your
selection.
If you selected “Reset”, the unit is reset to its factory
presets and switches to standby mode.
If you selected “Cancel”, the unit switches to standby
mode and nothing is reset.
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
63
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 64 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
GLOSSARY
GLOSSARY
Audio formats
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has
a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By
using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more
accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The
wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum
volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the
precise sound orientation generated using digital sound
processing provide listeners with previously unheard of
excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up
to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for
your enjoyment.
■ Dolby Digital Surround EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a
matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby
Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with
“flyover” and “fly-around” effects.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software.
This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology). Music and Game modes are also available for
2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel
sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode
for movies (for 2-channel sources only) and a Game mode
for games.
64
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers
to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/
24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video for music programs and motion picture
soundtracks on DVD-video.
■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a
left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus
an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1channels). The unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that
enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding the surround
back channel to existing 5.1-channel format.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6
channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two
modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music
sources and “Cinema mode” for movies.
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 65 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
GLOSSARY
Sound field programs
Audio information
■ CINEMA DSP
■ ITU-R
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed
for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually
measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses
YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine
Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to
provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater
in the listening room of your own home.
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R
recommends a standard speaker placement which is used
in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering
purposes.
■ SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any surround speakers by
using virtual surround speakers.
It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a
minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center
speaker.
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.
The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code
modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits.
The range of rates that can be played back is determined
based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by
the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the
sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies
that can be played back, and the higher the number of
quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
65
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 66 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
GLOSSARY
Video signal information
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB
and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.
A monitor with component input jacks is required in order
to use the component signal for output.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture;
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
■ S-Video signal
With the S-Video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-Video cable. Using the S
VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and
allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
66
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 67 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
AUDIO SECTION
VIDEO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω (HTR-5750) ................. 90 W
(HTR-5740) ................. 85 W
• Video Signal Type .......................................................... PAL/NTSC
• Maximum Power (EIAJ)
[China and Korea models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω (HTR-5750) ................................... 130 W
(HTR-5740) .................................. 125 W
• Signal to Noise Ratio .............................................................. 50 dB
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Composite ................................................ 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB
Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
S-Video (HTR-5750 only) ........................ 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 Ω (HTR-5750) ................................... 120/155/190/235 W
(HTR-5740) ................................... 115/150/185/230 W
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω (HTR-5740 only) .......................... 130 W
• Usable Sensitivity (IHF)........................................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω (HTR-5740 only) .......................... 95 W
• Damping Factor (IHF)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω .................................................. 100 or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3%
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB
• Frequency Response
CD terminal to Front L/R ...................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
• Frequency Response .......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 40 W, 8 Ω) ......... 0.06%
AM SECTION
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ............................... 100 dB
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ....................... 60 dB/45 dB
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
GENERAL
• Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 350 W/440 VA
[Other models] ................................................................... 360 W
• Output Level/Output Impedance
REC OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUB WOOFER ............................................................ 4 V/1.2 kΩ
• Standby Power Consumption ................................................. 0.1 W
• Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ..................................................... ±10 dB/60 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz
• AC Outlets
[U.K. and Australia models] .............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum)
[Other models] ................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)
• Dimension (W x H x D) ................................... 435 x 161 x 416 mm
(17-1/8” x 6-3/8” x 16-3/8”)
• Weight ................................................................ 11 kg (24 lbs 4 oz)
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
67
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page i Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES
TV
A TANDY
0941
ABEX
1151
ADMIRA
1141
ADVENTURA 1131
AIKO
1121
AIWA
1481
AKAI
0331, 1101, 1111
ALBA
0431
ALLERON
1091
AMBASSADOR
1081
AMSTRAD
0481, 1081
ANAM
0251, 1041, 1051,
1061, 1071
ANAM NATIONAL 1041
AOC
0361, 1021, 1031,
1111, 1161
ARCHER
1161
AUDIOSONIC 1001
AUDIOVOX
1051, 1161
BAUER
0441
BAUR
1001
BEIJING
1511, 1551, 1561
BELCOR
1031
BELL & HOWELL 0981, 0991
BEON
1001
BRADFORD 1051
BROCKWOOD 1031
BROKSONIC 1161
BUSH
1001
CANDLE
0351, 0361, 0961,
0971, 1111, 1131
CAPEHART
1021
CARVER
0101
CATHAY
1001
CELEBRITY 0951
CENTURION 0411
CHANGHONG 1541, 1551, 1561,
1621
CITIZEN
0351, 0361, 0921,
0931, 0941, 0961,
0971, 1111, 1121,
1131
CLAIRTONE 1011
CLARIVOX
1001
CONCERTO 0351, 0971
CONROWA
1751
CONTEC
0901, 0911, 1011,
1051
CORANDO
0941
CRAIG
0251, 1051
CROWN
0941, 1051
CURTIS MATHES
0161, 0361,
0931, 0941,
0981, 1111
CXC
1051
DAEWOO
0291, 0301, 0331,
0721, 0941, 1001,
1031, 1121, 1191,
1531, 1581, 1591,
1601
DANSAI
1001
i
DAYTRON
0941, 1031
DECCA
0271, 1001
DIXI
0331, 1001, 1071
DUMONT
0891, 1031
DYNATECH 0881
ELECTROBAND
0951, 1011
ELECTROHOME
0941
ELECTRON
0941
ELIN
1001
ELTA
0331
EMERSON
0001, 0021, 0061,
0071, 0081, 0091,
0111, 0811, 0821,
0831, 0841, 0851,
0861, 0871, 0901,
0921, 0941, 0981,
1011, 1031, 1051,
1081, 1091
ENVISION
0361, 1111
ERRES
1001
ETRON
0331
FERGUSON 1001
FINLUX
1001
FISHER
0171, 0801, 0981
FORMENTI
0441
FORMONTI
1001
FORTRESS
1141
FUJITSU
1091
FUNAI
1051, 1091, 1501,
1521
FUTURETECH 1051
GE
0131, 0161, 0201,
0751, 0761, 0771,
0781, 0791, 0811,
0861, 1041
GEC
0271, 1001
GEMINI
0391
GENEXXA
0431
GIBRALTER 0891, 1031, 1111
GOODMANS/TASHIKO
0271, 0661, 1001
GRANADA
1001
GRUNDIG
1781, 1791, 1801,
1811, 1821, 1831,
1841, 1851, 1861,
1871, 1881
GUNPY
1051, 1091
HARMAN/KARDON 0721
HALLMARK 0861
HANSEATIC 1001
HARVARD
1051, 1061
HINARI
1001, 1091
HITACHI
0181, 0351, 0671,
0681, 0691, 0701,
0711, 0871, 0941,
0971, 1351
HYPSON
1001
IMA
1051
INDIANA
1001
INFINITY REFERENCE
0101
INTERFUNK 1001
ITT
0611
JANEIL
1131
JBL
JCB
JENSEN
JINXING
0101
0951
0311
1531, 1541, 1551,
1561, 1571, 1621,
1631, 1641, 1651,
1691, 1731
JVC (VICTOR) 0261, 0281, 0641,
0651, 0661, 0841
KAWASHO
0901
KAYPANI
1021
KENWOOD
0361, 1031, 1111
KLOSS
0631, 0721, 1131
KTV
0921, 0941, 1011,
1051, 1111
LEYCO
1001
LG (GOLDSTAR)
0031, 0121,
0351, 0411, 0731,
0741, 0861, 0941,
0971, 1001, 1031,
1111, 1151
LIESENK & TTER 1001
LLOYTRON 0941
LOEWE
1001
LOGIK
0991, 1771
LUXMAN
0351, 0971
LXI
0101, 0621, 0761,
0861, 0981
MAGNAVOX 0101, 0341, 0391,
0401, 0411, 0421,
0581, 0591, 0601,
0611, 0631, 0661,
0961, 1111
MAJESTIC
0991
MARANTZ
0101, 0221, 0361,
1001, 1111
MARK
1001
MATSUI
0271, 0331, 1001
MEDIATOR
1001
MEGATRON 0691, 0861, 1161
MEI
1011
M-ELECTRONIC
1001
MEMOREX
0331, 0571, 0861,
0971, 0981, 0991,
1771
METZ
1791, 1831, 1891,
1901, 1911, 1921,
1931, 1941
MGA
0361, 0561, 0571,
0861, 1031, 1111
MIDLAND
0751, 0761, 0891,
0941, 1151
MITSUBISHI 0221, 0321, 0561,
0571, 0661, 0861,
1031, 1101, 1381
MONTGOMERY
1091
MOTOROLA 1041, 1141
MTC
0351, 0361, 0881,
0931, 0971, 1011,
1031, 1111
MULTITECH 0881, 1051
NAD
0551, 0621, 0861
NEC
0241, 0351, 0361,
0661, 0971, 1031,
1111, 1321, 1711
NECKERMANN
1001
NEI
1001
NIKKAI
0271, 0431, 1001,
1151
NIKKO
0861, 1111, 1121
NOVABEAM 0721
NTC
1121
ONWA
1051
OPTIMUS
0551
OPTONICA
0541, 1141
ORION
0831, 1001
OSAKI
0271, 1151
OTTO VERSAND
1001
PANASONIC 0101, 0191, 0251,
0751, 1041, 1311,
1371, 1431
PANDA
1541, 1721
PENNY
0161, 0361, 0521,
0531, 0621, 0731,
0751, 0761, 0781,
0791, 0861, 0931,
0941, 1031, 1041,
1111, 1151, 1161
PEONY
1561, 1621
PHILCO
0361, 0581, 0591,
0601, 0611, 0631,
0961, 1031, 1111
PHILIPS
0101, 0401, 1001
PHONOLA
1001
PILOT
0941, 1031, 1111
PIONEER
0511, 0551, 0871
PORTLAND 0941, 1031, 1121
PRICECLUB 0931
PRISM
0751
PROSCAN
0761
PROTECH
1001
PROTON
0501, 0861, 0941,
1021, 1161
PULSAR
0891
PULSER
1031
QUASAR
0251, 0751, 1041
QUELLE
1001
RADIO SHACK
0541, 0941,
1031, 1051,
1151
RADIOLA
1001
RCA
0051, 0141, 0151,
0181, 0411, 0491,
0531, 0761, 0771,
0871, 1031
REALISTIC
0541, 0861, 0941,
0971, 0981, 1031,
1051, 1111, 1151
RHAPSODY 1011
R-LINE
1001
RUNCO
0891, 1111
SAISHO
0331, 1081
SAMPO
0361, 0941, 1021,
1111, 1151
SAMSUNG
0331, 0341, 0351,
0361, 0861, 0931,
0941, 0971, 1001,
1031, 1111, 1151
SAMSUX
0941
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page ii Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
SANYO
0171, 0231, 0271,
0661, 0801, 0911,
0981, 1231, 1251,
1261
SBR
1001
SCHEIDER
1001
SCIMITSU
1031
SCOTCH
0861
SCOTT
0831, 0861, 0941,
1031, 1051, 1091
SEARS
0101, 0161, 0171,
0351, 0481, 0521,
0621, 0761, 0801,
0861, 0971, 0981,
1091
SHANGHAI
1561, 1681
SHARP
0461, 0471, 0541,
0661, 0911, 0941,
1141
SHOGUN
1031
SIGNATURE 0991, 1771
SIMPSON
0581, 0961
SOLAVOX
1151
SONOKO
1001
SONTEC
1001
SONY
0371, 0451, 0661,
0841, 0951, 1281,
1441
SOUNDESIGN 0861, 0961, 1051,
1091
SOUNDWAVE 1001
SPECTRICON 1161
SQUAREVIEW 0481
SSS
1031, 1051
STAR-LITE
1051
SUPREM
0951
SUPRE-MACY 1131
SURPA
0351, 0971
SYLVANIA
0101, 0361, 0441,
0581, 0591, 0601,
0611, 0631, 0961,
1111
SYMPHONIC 0481
SYSLINE
1001
TANDY
0271, 0431, 1141
TATUNG
0271, 0881, 1001,
1041, 1161
TCL
1561, 1631, 1701
TECHNICS
0751
TECHWOOD 0351, 0751, 0971
TEKNIKA
0101, 0351, 0571,
0931, 0941, 0961,
0971, 0991, 1031,
1051, 1091, 1121,
1131, 1771
TELETECH
0331
TERA
0501
THAKRAL
1671
THORM
1001
TMK
0351, 0861, 0971,
1081
TOSHIBA
0381, 0521, 0621,
0661, 0931, 0981,
1301
TOSONIC
1011
TOTEVISION 0941
TRICAL
0911
UNIVERSAL 0781, 0791
UNIVERSUM 1001
VECTOR RESEARCH
0361, 1111
VESTEL
1001
VIDEO CONCEPT 1101
VIDIKRON
0101, 0211
VIDTECH
0861, 1031
VIKING
1131
WARDS
0101, 0361, 0451,
0541, 0581, 0591,
0601, 0611, 0771,
0781, 0791, 0861,
0971, 0991, 1031,
1091, 1111, 1771
WATSON
1001
XOGEGO
1611, 1621, 1661,
1741, 1761
YAMAHA
0361, 1031, 1111
YOKO
1001
ZENITH
0011, 0041, 0891,
0991, 1771
ZONDA
1161
CABLE TV
ABC
0256, 0376
ANTRONIX
0136
ARCHER
0136, 0286
BBT
0076
CABLETIME 0166
CABLEVISION
0196
COLOUR VOICE
0306, 0346
COMTRONICS
0216, 0276
EAGLE COMTRONICS
0276
EASTERN
0066
ELECTRICORD
0206
ELECTUS
0266
GE
0116, 0126
GEC CABLE SYSTEM
0196
HAMLIN H5 0676
HAMLIN H6 0666
HAMLIN H6S 0656
HAMLIN H8 0646
HAMLIN H9 0636
JERROLD
0256
JERROLD 400L
0626
JERROLD 450L
0616
JERROLD 550
0606
JERROLD OSD CATV
0596
JERROLD SPRUCER
0436
MAGNAVOX/PHILIPS
0416, 0426
MAMM
0296
MEMOREX
0386
MOVIE TIME 0146, 0206
NORTHCOAST
0016
NSC
0146
OAK
0106
OAK SIGMA 450
0546
OAK SIGMA 550
0536
PANASONIC TZ 120/130
0476
PANASONIC TZ 170/180
0446
PANASONIC TZ140 0466
PANASONIC TZ150/160
0456
PARAGON
PHILIPS
0386
0036, 0216, 0306,
0316, 0326, 0336,
0346
PIONEER
0006, 0086
PIONEER BR50
0846
PIONEER BR60/70/80/81/82
0696
PIONEER BR90
0556
PULSAR
0386
RCA DIGITAL SATELLITE
SYSTEM
0396, 0406
REALISTIC
0136
REGENCY/EASTERN0686
RUNCO
0386
SAMSUNG
0276
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 175/475
0576
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 75
0366, 0586
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 8650
0566
SIGNAL
0276
SL MARX
0276
SPECTAVISION
0236
STANDARD COMPONENTS
0186
STARCOM V 0256
STARGATE
0276
SYLVANIA/TEXSCAN
0376, 0496
TEKNIKA
0176
TELESERVICE
0056
TELEVIEW
0276
TEXSCAN
0186, 0376
TFC
0026
TOCOM
0226, 0356
TOCOM 5503A 0526
TOCOM 5503VIP/5507
0516
TOCOM TC56 0506
TOSHIBA
0386
TUDI
0046
UNIKA
0136
UNIVERSAL 0136, 0156, 0206,
0286
VIDEOWAY
0096
VIEWSTAR
0216
ZENITH
0246, 0386, 0486
SATELLITE TUNER
ALPHA STAR 0826
CHAPARRAL 0756
ECHOSTAR
0836
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0776, 0876
HTS
0836
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
0816
JERROLD
0776, 0786
PANASONIC 0806
PRIMESTAR 0776, 0786
RCA
0766
SONY
0796
(DBS)
HITACHI
MAGNAVOX
MEMOREX
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
SONY
STAR CHOICE
TOSHIBA
UNIDEN
0856
0886
0886
0896
0886
0906
0876
0866, 0916
0886
VCR
A TANDY
ADVENTURA
AIKO
AIWA
AKAI
0902
0992
0982
0992
0262, 0942, 0952,
0962, 0972
AMERICAN HIGH 0932
AMSTRAD
0992
ASA
0002, 0912
ASHA
0922
AUDIO DYNAMICS 0202
AUDIOVOX
0912
BEAUMARK 0922
BELL & HOWELL 0902
BLAUPUNKT 0412
BROKSONIC 0872, 0882, 0892
BUSH
0852
CALIX
0912
CANON
0862, 0932
CCE
0852, 0982
CITIZEN
0912, 0982
COLT
0852
CRAIG
0832, 0842, 0852,
0912, 0922
CURTIS MATHES
0662, 0822,
0932
CYBERNEX 0922
DAEWOO
0802, 0812, 0982
DBX
0202
DYNATECH 0472, 0992
ELECTROHOME
0912
ELECTROPHONIC 0912
EMEREX
0792
EMERSON
0072, 0132, 0142,
0152, 0162, 0172,
0182, 0192, 0212,
0702, 0712, 0722,
0732, 0742, 0752,
0762, 0772, 0782,
0872, 0882, 0892,
0912, 0952, 0992,
1072
FINLUX
0002, 0992
FISHER
0682, 0692, 0842,
0902
FUJI
0672, 0932
FUNAI
0992
GARRARD
0992
GE
0662, 0822, 0932
GO VIDEO
0642, 0652
GOODMANS 0402
GRADIENTE 0992
GRANDA
0612, 0902
GRUNDIG
0002
HARLEY DAVIDSON
0992
ii
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page iii Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
HARMAN/KARDON
0632, 1082
HARWOOD
0752, 0852
HEADQUARTER
0612
HI-Q
0842
HINARI
0852
HITACHI
0102, 0562, 0572,
0582, 0592, 0602,
0992
ITT
0942
JVC (VICTOR) 0202, 0522, 0532,
0542, 0552
KENWOOD
0202, 0542, 0612,
0632, 0902
KLH
0852
KODAK
0912, 0932
LG (GOLDSTAR)
0082, 0632,
0912
LLOYD
0992
LOGIK
0852
LUXOR
0942
LXI
0022, 0912
MAGNAVOX 0002, 0482, 0492,
0502, 0512, 0932
MAGNIN
0922
MARANTZ
0002, 0202, 0402,
0632, 0932
MARTA
0912
MATSUSHITA 0932
MATSUI
0722
MEI
0222, 0932
MEMOREX
0232, 0242, 0472,
0512, 0612, 0842,
0902, 0912, 0922,
0932, 0992
MGA
0762, 0952
MGA TECHNOLOGY
0922
MINOLTA
0592, 0602
MITSUBISHI 0452, 0462, 0542,
0762, 0952, 1082
MOTOROLA 0472, 0932
MTC
0922, 0992
MULTITECH 0852, 0992
NAD
0442
NEC
0122, 0202, 0292,
0422, 0432, 0542,
0632
NIKKO
0912
NOBLEX
0922
OLYMPUS
0412, 0932
OPTIMUS
0442, 0472, 0912
OPTONICA
0402
ORION
0212, 0722, 0742,
0772
OSAKI
0912
PANASONIC 0012, 0052, 0092,
0222, 0372, 0382,
0392, 0412, 0932
PENNY
0202, 0432, 0602,
0632, 0692, 0912,
0922, 0932
PENTAX
0592, 0602
PERDIO
0992
PHILCO
0002, 0932
PHILIPS
0002, 0282, 0402,
0492, 0932
PILOT
0912
PIONEER
0442, 0542
iii
PROSCAN
1002, 1012, 1022,
1032, 1042, 1052,
1062
PULSAR
0512
QUARTER
0612
QUARTZ
0272, 0612
QUASAR
0382, 0392, 0932
RADIO SHACK
0912, 0992
RADIX
0912
RANDEX
0912
RCA
0112, 0382, 0392,
0482, 0592, 0602,
0662, 0822, 0942
REALISTIC
0402, 0472, 0612,
0682, 0842, 0902,
0912, 0922, 0932,
0992
RICOH
0352, 0362
SAISHO
0212, 0582, 0722,
0732, 0742, 0772
SALORA
0612, 0762
SAMSUNG
0212, 0312, 0922,
0962
SANKY
0472, 0512
SANSUI
0292, 0542, 0832
SANYO
0242, 0612, 0842,
0902, 0922
SBR
0002, 0282
SCHEIDER
0852
SCOTT
0342, 0712, 0762,
0872, 0882, 0892
SEARS
0302, 0592, 0602,
0612, 0682, 0692,
0842, 0902, 0912,
0932
SHARP
0402, 0472
SHINTOM
0852
SHOGUN
0922
SINGER
0852
SONY
0032, 0332, 0352,
0362, 0672, 0792,
0932
STS
0602
SUNPAK
0352
SYLVANIA
0002, 0492, 0502,
0762, 0932, 0992
SYMPHONIC 0992
TANDY
0992
TASHIKO
0712, 0992
TEAC
0992
TECHNICS
0932
TEKNIKA
0322, 0912, 0932,
0992
TELEFUNKEN 0252
TMK
0212, 0732, 0772,
0922
TOSHIBA
0062, 0302, 0342,
0622, 0682, 0712,
0762
TOTEVISION 0912, 0922
UNITECH
0922
VECTOR RESEARCH
0202, 0432, 0632
VIDEO CONCEPTS
0202, 0432, 0632,
0952
WARDS
0322, 0402, 0472,
0482, 0602, 0712,
0842, 0852, 0922,
0932, 0992
YAMAHA
ZENITH
0202, 0632
0042, 0362, 0512,
0672
DVD PLAYER
AKAI
0058
AIWA
0218
DENON
0188
HITACHI
0198
JVC (VICTOR) 0088, 0178
KENWOOD
0148
LG (GOLDSTAR)
0228
MAGNAVOX 0128
MITSUBISHI 0138
ONKYO
0068, 0128
PANASONIC 0028
PHILIPS
0098, 0128
PIONEER
0108, 0118
PROSCAN
0158
RCA
0158
SAMSUNG
0078
SHARP
0038
SONY
0018
TECHNICS
0028
THOMSON
0168
TOSHIBA
0048, 0128
YAMAHA
0008, 0028, 0098
ZENITH
0128
DVD RECORDER
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
TOSHIBA
YAMAHA
0238, 0248, 0258
0208
0278, 0288, 0298
0268
0208
LD PLAYER
AIWA
0157
DENON
0147
DISCO VISION0017
FUNAI
0157
HITACHI (E) 0017
KENWOOD
0087, 0107
MAGNAVOX 0027
MARANTZ
0027
MITSUBISHI 0137
NAD
0137
PANASONIC 0077, 0177
PHILIPS
0027
PIONEER
0017, 0037, 0137
RCA
0167
REALISTIC
0157
SHARP
0127
SONY
0047, 0057, 0117
VICTOR
0097
YAMAHA
0007, 0067
CD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC RESEARCH
1295
ADC
0025, 0065
ADCOM
0205, 0255, 1015
ADS
0265
AIWA
0295, 0945, 1035,
1055
AKAI
0175, 0485, 0535
ALPINE
1215, 1305
AUDIO-TECHNICA 0545
BSR
0245, 0655, 0775
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB
0055
CAPETRONIC 1205
CARRERA
0245
CARVER
0285, 1135
CASIO
0345
CROWN
0185
CURTIS MATHES
0345
DENON
0275, 0875, 0885
DEUAL (E)
0505
DYNAMIC BASS (H)
0555
EMERSON
0205, 0325, 1105
EROICA
1275
FISHER
0095, 0555, 0925,
1005
GARRARD
0365
GENEXXA
0305, 0325, 1105
HARMAN/KARDON 0105, 0175,
0465, 0995
HITACHI
0195, 0205, 0505,
0815
INKEL
0115, 0395
JVC (VICTOR) 0315
KENWOOD
0045, 0095, 0405,
0585, 0725, 0735,
0745, 0755, 0895
KYOCERA
0025
LG (GOLDSTAR)
1135, 1225,
1265, 1335
LUXMAN
0075, 0425, 0675,
0705, 0715, 0985
MAGNAVOX 0165, 0215, 0645,
0955
MARANTZ
0215, 0235, 0375,
0785, 1345
MCINTOSH
0355, 1085
MCS
0905, 1315
MEMOREX
0205, 0225, 0235,
0305, 0325, 1105
MGA
0135
MISSION
0215
MITSUBISHI 0135, 0445
MTC
1255
NAD
0035, 0615, 0685,
0695
NAKAMICHI 0125, 0435, 0515
NEC
0255, 0905, 0965
NIKKO
0545, 1005
ONKYO
0155, 0455, 0495,
0805, 1155
OPTIMUS
0225, 0245, 0555,
0595, 0845, 0855,
0865, 0895, 0935
PANASONIC 0055, 0825, 1095,
1125
PENNY
0905
PHILIPS
0165, 0215
PIONEER
0305, 0935, 1045
PROTON
0215, 1185
QUASAR
0055
RCA
0205, 0915, 1115
REALISTIC
0205, 0225, 0235,
0325, 0555, 0845
REVOX
1175
ROTEL
0215
SABA TELECOMMANDER (E)
0505
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page iv Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
SAE
SAMSUNG
SANSUI
0215
1285
0215, 0625, 0975,
1025, 1105
SANYO
0145, 0555, 0635,
0765
SCOTT
0325, 1105
SEARS
0345
SHARP
0235, 0665, 0895,
1065, 1075
SHERWOOD 0115, 0235, 0395,
0475
SIEMENTS GARRARD
1245
SIGNATURE 0175
SONTEC
1165
SONY
0065, 0565, 0865,
1145
STARON
1235
STS
0025
SYLVANIA
0215
SYMPHONIC 0335
TANDY
0305
TANGBERG 1195
TEAC
0235, 0335, 0385,
0525, 0795, 0835,
1355
TECHNICS
0055, 0605, 1095
TECHWOOD 1325
TELEFUNKEN (E) 0505
THOMSON (E) 0505
TOSHIBA
0035, 0685
VECTOR RESEARCH
0065, 1135
WARDS
0175
YAMAHA
0005, 0015, 0085,
0415, 0545, 0575,
1065
OPTIMUS
ONKYO
PHILIPS
PIONEER
REVOX
SANSUI
SHARP
SHERWOOD
SONY
TEAC
TECHNICS
WARDS
YAMAHA
0034, 0064, 0204,
0334
0364, 0374
0094
0034, 0044, 0064
0354
0094, 0344
0264
0334
0054, 0084, 0324
0194, 0254
0074, 0314
0034
0004, 0014, 0104,
0114, 0164, 0174,
0264
CD RECORDER
HITACHI
JVC (VICTOR)
MARANTZ
PHILIPS
PIONEER
YAMAHA
0474
0504
0484, 0494
0444
0454
0414
MD RECORDER
KENWOOD
PIONEER
SHARP
SONY
YAMAHA
0384
0424
0434
0394
0024, 0394, 0404,
0514
TAPE DECK
AIWA
AKAI
CARVER
DENON
FISHER
GARRARD
JVC (VICTOR)
KENWOOD
MAGNAVOX
MARANTZ
MITSUBISHI
0094, 0214, 0224
0184
0094
0304
0144
0194, 0204
0274, 0284, 0294
0124, 0134, 0154,
0234, 0244, 0264
0094
0094, 0344
0184
iv
00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM
© 2004
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia
WC85350

HTR-5750/HTR-5740

AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL

U

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

i

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use

a damp cloth for cleaning.

6Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by

the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9A product and cart combination should be moved with care.

Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven

surfaces may cause the product and cart

combination to overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack

unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s

instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the

product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page i Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

ii

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-

mance — this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,

be sure the service technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the same

characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized

substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other

hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to

this product, ask the service technician to perform safety

checks to determine that the product is in proper operating

condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna

or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,

provides information with regard to proper grounding of the

mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire

to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s

attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides

guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies

that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding

system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as

practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to

follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15

for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found

in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page ii Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

iii

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this

manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future

reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool,

dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat

sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.

Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top,

20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of

this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical

appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid

humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature

changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit

in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with

a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this

unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may

fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to

liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit,

do not place:

Other components, as they may cause damage

and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.

Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall

and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user

and/or damage to this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,

curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If

the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may

overheat, possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall

outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this

might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.

Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified

is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this

unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be

held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the

power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical

storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact

qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any

service is needed. The cabinet should never be

opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods

of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug

from the wall outlet.

16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

on common operating errors before concluding that

this unit is faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set

this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the

AC power plug from the wall outlet.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound

come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion — and, most importantly, without affecting your

sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YA MAHA and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid

prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as

long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself

is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this

state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of

power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page iii Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

1

English

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

FEATURES………..………………………………………….. 2

GETTING STARTED…………………………..………… 3

Supplied accessories .……………….…………….………….. 3

Installing batteries in the remote control ……..……….. 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS .………………..…. 4

Front panel …….………………………….…………….……….. 4

Remote control.………………………….……………….…….. 6

Using the remote control ……………….…………….…….. 7

Front panel display …………………….…………….……….. 8

Rear panel ……..………………………….…………….……….. 9

SPEAKER SETUP ……………………………………….. 10

Speaker placement .…………….…………….……………… 10

Speaker connections …………………..…………….……… 11

CONNECTIONS ….………………………………………. 13

Before connecting components.……………….………… 13

Connecting video components……..……………….…… 14

Connecting audio components………..…………….…… 17

Connecting the antennas…………..…………….………… 18

Connecting the power supply cord ………..…………… 19

Turning on the power……….………………………….…… 21

BASIC SETUP.…………..………….…………………….. 22

Using the BASIC SETUP menu………………………… 22

PLAYBACK…….…………………………………………… 25

Basic operations……………………………….…………… 25

Selecting sound field programs ………………………. 27

Selecting input modes…..…………….……………….…… 31

TUNING ….……………………..……………………………. 33

Automatic and manual tuning…………………….……… 33

Presetting stations …………………………………………. 34

Selecting preset stations..……………….…………….…… 36

Exchanging preset stations ……….……………….……… 37

RECORDING ……………………..……………………….. 38

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

DESCRIPTIONS.…………………………………..…..39

For movie/video sources……………….…………….……. 39

For music sources …….……………….…………….………. 41

ADVANCED OPERATIONS …………….…………..42

Using the sleep timer ……..……………….…………….…. 42

Manually adjusting speaker levels….…………….……. 43

Using the test tone ………………………….…………….…. 43

SET MENU …….……………………………………………..44

Using SET MENU…………….………………………….. 45

1 SOUND MENU………………..………………………….. 46

2 INPUT MENU………………………….…………….…. 48

3 OPTION MENU…………………….…………….………. 49

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ……………....51

Control area ………….…………….………………………….. 51

Setting manufacturer codes………………………….……. 52

Controlling other components .………………………….. 53

Clearing setup manufacturer codes……………….…. 54

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ……55

What is a sound field ..…………….……………….………. 55

Changing parameter settings …………………………….. 55

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER

DESCRIPTIONS.…………………………………..…..57

TROUBLESHOOTING …..…………………………….59

RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS ……..63

GLOSSARY…………………………………………………..64

Audio formats …….………………………….…………….…. 64

Sound field programs…..……………….…………….……. 65

Audio information ……………………….…………….……. 65

Video signal information…..……………….…………….. 66

SPECIFICATIONS…………….……………………..…..67

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

FEATURES

2

Built-in 6-channel power amplifier

Minimum RMS output power

[ HTR-5750 ]

(0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8)

Front: 90 W + 90 W

Center: 90 W

Surround: 90 W + 90 W

Surround back: 90 W

[ HTR-5740 ]

(0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8)

Front: 85 W + 85 W

Center: 85 W

Surround: 85 W + 85 W

Surround back: 85 W

Sound field features

Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of

sound fields

Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

DTS/DTS ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6,

DTS 96/24 decoder

Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic

IIx decoder

Virtual CINEMA DSP

SILENT CINEMA

Sophisticated AM/FM tuner

40-station random access preset tuning

Automatic preset tuning

Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)

Other features

192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

A SET MENU which provides you with items for

optimizing this unit for your audio/video system

6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input

Component video input/output capability

Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

Sleep timer

Cinema and music night listening modes

Remote control with preset manufacturer codes

[ HTR-5750 only ]

S-Video signal input/output capability

Video signal conversion (Composite video S-Video)

capability for monitor out

This document is the owner’s manual for both HTR-5750 and HTR-5740. Model names are given where the details of functions are

unique to each model. Illustrations for HTR-5750 are mainly used for explanations.

y indicates a tip for your operation.

Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button

names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.

This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In

case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of

Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

FEATURES

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 2 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

GETTING STARTED

3

English

INTRODUCTION

Please check that you received all of the following parts.

1Press the part and slide the battery

compartment cover off.

2Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03,

UM-4) according to the polarity markings

(+ and –) on the inside of the battery

compartment.

3Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

Notes on batteries

Change all of the batteries if you notice the condition like; the

operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator

does not flash or its light becomes dim.

Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

GETTING STARTED

Supplied accessories

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDI O

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

FREQ/RDS EONSTARTMODE PTY SEEK

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

SELECT

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

PRESET/CH

RAV251

WC55290 EU

Remote control

Batteries (4)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.S.A., Canada and

China models)

AM loop antenna 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna

adapter (U.K. model only)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.K., Europe, Australia

and Korea models)

Installing batteries in the remote

control

1

3

2

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 3 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

4

1STANDBY/ON

Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When you

turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4

to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound.

In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in

order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control.

2Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control.

3Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit.

4FM/AM

Switches the reception band between FM and AM.

5A/B/C/D/E (NEXT)

Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when

the unit is in tuner mode.

Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted when the unit is

not in tuner mode.

6PRESET/TUNING l / h (LEVEL –/+)

Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is

displayed next to the band indication in the front panel

display when the unit is in tuner mode. Selects the tuning

frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed.

Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using

A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) when the unit is not in tuner mode.

7MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for

more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.

8TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Switches between automatic tuning (AUTO indicator on)

and manual tuning (AUTO indicator off).

9VIDEO AUX jacks

Input audio and video signals from a portable external

source such as a game console. To reproduce source

signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source.

0VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the REC OUT level.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

21347 856 09

EON

MODE

START

(U.S.A. model)

Note

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 4 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

5

English

INTRODUCTION

APHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack

Outputs audio signals for private listening with

headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals

are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers.

All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down

to the left and right headphone channels.

BSPEAKERS A/B

Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A

and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the

corresponding button is pressed.

CPRESET/TUNING (EDIT)

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h

(LEVEL –/+) between selecting preset station numbers

and tuning.

DSTRAIGHT (EFFECT)

Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is

selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are

output directly from their respective speakers without

effect processing.

ECONTROL

Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left and

right speakers (see page 26).

FBASS/TREBLE –/+

Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left and

right speakers (in conjunction with CONTROL).

GPROGRAM l / h

Use to select sound field programs (see page 26).

HINPUT MODE

Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of

signals received when one component is connected to two

or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 31).

IINPUT selector

Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.

JMULTI CH INPUT

Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes

priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input

selector buttons on the remote control).

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 5 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

6

This section describes the function of each control on the

remote control used to control this unit. To operate other

components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on

page 51.

1Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2CODE SET

Use to set up manufacturer codes (see page 52).

3Input selector buttons

Select the input source and change the control area.

4Sound field program / numeric buttons (1 — 8)

Use to select sound field programs.

Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when the

unit is in tuner mode.

5NIGHT

Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 30).

6LEVEL

Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the

level.

7Cursor buttons u / d / j / i / SELECT

Use to select and adjust sound field program parameters or

SET MENU items.

Press u / d to select preset station numbers when the unit

is in tuner mode.

8TEST (RETURN)

Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.

Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the

SET MENU parameters.

9TRANSMIT indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.

0STANDBY

Sets this unit in the standby mode.

ASYSTEM POWER

Turns on the power of this unit.

BSLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

CMULTI CH IN

Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external

decoder (etc.).

DAMP

Selects the AMP mode. You must select the AMP mode to

control the main unit.

EVOLUME/+

Increases or decreases the volume level.

FMUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to

the previous volume level.

GEX/ES

Switches between 5.1 or 6.1-channel playback of multi-

channel software.

Remote control

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

DISC SKIP

FREQ/RDS

EON

START

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

MODE

PTY SEEK

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

SELECT

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

PRESET/CH

9

0

A

B

C

D

E

F

H

I

1

2

3

4

5

7

8

6

G

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 6 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

7

English

INTRODUCTION

HSTRAIGHT (EFFECT)

Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is

selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are

output directly from their respective speakers without

effect processing.

ISET MENU (A/B/C/D/E)

Activates the SET MENU function.

Selects preset station groups when the unit is in tuner

mode.

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on the main unit during operation.

Handling the remote control

Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote

control.

Do not drop the remote control.

Do not leave or store the remote control in the

following types of conditions:

high humidity such as near a bath

high temperature such as near a heater or stove

extremely low temperatures

dusty places

Using the remote control

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

30 30

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSICENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

SELECT

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

PRESET/CH

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 7 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

8

1Decoder indicators

When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective

indicator lights up.

2SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound

field program is selected (see page 26).

3NIGHT indicator

Lights up when you select night listening mode.

4Input source indicators

A cursor lights to show the current input source.

5Sound field indicators

Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields.

6CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field

program.

7AUTO indicator

Lights up to indicate that automatic tuning is possible.

8TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station.

9STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an

FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.

0MEMORY indicator

Blinks to show that a station can be stored.

AMUTE indicator

Blinks while the MUTE function is on.

BVOLUME level indication

Indicates the volume level.

CPCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code

modulation) digital audio signals.

DVIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see

page 31).

EHeadphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

FSP A B indicators

Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.

Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are

selected.

GSLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

HHiFi DSP

Lights when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program.

IMulti-information display

Shows the current sound field program name and other

information when adjusting or changing settings.

J96/24 indicator

Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

KLFE indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.

LInput channel indicators/speaker indicators

Indicate the channel components of the current digital

input signal.

Indicate the number of speakers connected in SPEAKERS

(page 23), or indicate the channel being adjusted in SP

LEVEL (page 47).

Front panel display

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

q

PL

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT PTY HOLD

AUTO

PS

RT CT

EON

PTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

123456 780AB9

FG H I K LJEDC

Presence DSP sound field

Listening position

Left surround

DSP sound field Right surround

DSP sound field

Surround back DSP sound field

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 8 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

9

English

INTRODUCTION

1DIGITAL INPUT jacks

[ HTR-5750 ]

CD5, DTV/CBL4, DVD3, MD/CD-R2

[ HTR-5740 ]

CD3, DTV/CBL2, DVD1

See pages 14, 16 and 17 for details.

2MULTI CH INPUT jacks

See page 15 for connection information.

3Video component jacks

See pages 14 and 16 for connection information.

S VIDEO jacks are only available for HTR-5750.

4AC OUTLET(S)

Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see

page 19).

5DIGITAL OUTPUT jack (HTR-5750 only)

See page 17 for details.

6Audio component jacks

See page 17 for connection information.

7SUB WOOFER OUTPUT jack

See page 12 for connection information.

8Antenna terminals

See page 18 for connection information.

9Speaker terminals

See page 12 for connection information.

0IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

See page 20.

Rear panel

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

MONITOR OUT

MULTI CH INPUT

OUTPUT

AUDIO

AUDIO

VIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

DTV

/CBL

VIDEO

RL

RL

IN

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

MD

/CD-R

CD

OUT

VCR

VIDEO

IN

FRONT

SURROUND

TUNER

AM

ANT

GND

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

R

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

DTV

/CBL

P

B

Y

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

OPTICAL

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

CD

COAXIAL

FM

ANT

OPTICAL

SUB

WOOFER

S VIDEO

RL

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

MD/CD-R

75 UNBAL.

SPEAKERS

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND

BACK

R

RLL

+

+

+

+++

+

+

A

B

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

12 3 4

56 78 9 0

(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 9 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

SPEAKER SETUP

10

The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R

speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and

multi-channel audio sources.

Front speakers (FR and FL)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus

effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from

the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker

from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds

(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical

to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,

however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front

face of the center speaker with the front face of your video

monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front

speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as

directly over or under it.

Surround speakers (SR and SL)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround

sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening

position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above

the floor.

Surround back speaker (SB)

The surround back speaker supplements the surround

speakers and provides for more realistic front-to-back

transitions. Place this speaker directly behind the listening

position and at the same height as the surround speakers.

Subwoofer

The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active

Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only

for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,

but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and

DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so

critical, because low bass sounds are not highly

directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the

front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the

room to reduce wall reflections.

SPEAKER SETUP

Speaker placement

60˚

30˚

SB

FL

FR

C

SL

SR

SR

80˚

SL

1.8 m (6 ft)

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 10 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

11

English

SPEAKER SETUP

PREPARATION

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),

“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the

polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound

will be unnatural and lack bass.

If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set

this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 6

ohms before using (see page 20).

Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the

power of this unit is off.

Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do

not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This

could damage this unit and/or speakers.

Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of

speakers still creates the interference with the monitor,

place the speakers away from the monitor.

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped

differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.

Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)

terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain

cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

1Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8″) of

insulation from the end of each speaker

cable.

2Twist the exposed wires of the cable together

to prevent short circuits.

3Unscrew the knob.

4Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side

of each terminal.

5Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

Banana plug connections

(With the exception of U.K. and Europe models)

First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug

connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.

Speaker connections

CAUTION

10 mm (3/8″)

12

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

34

5

Banana plug

(With the exception of U.K. and

Europe models)

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 11 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

12

SPEAKER SETUP

FRONT terminals

Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If

you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the

FRONT A or B terminals.

The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems

simultaneously.

CENTER terminals

Connect a center speaker to these terminals.

SURROUND terminals

Connect surround speakers to these terminals.

SUB WOOFER jack

Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

to this jack.

SURROUND BACK terminals

Connect a surround back speaker to these terminals.

OUTPUT

SUB

WOOFER

SPEAKERS

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND

BACK

R

RLL

+

+

+

+

++

+

+

A

B

2 3 6 71

54

Subwoofer

system

Center

speaker

Front speakers (A)

Surround back

speaker

LeftRight

LeftRight

Surround speakers

Front

speakers

(B)

(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)

Note 1

2

3

4

5

7

6

Speaker layout

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 12 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

CONNECTIONS

13

English

PREPARATION

Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains

power until all connections between components are

complete.

Cable indications

Analog jacks

You can input analog signals from audio components by

connecting audio pin cable to the analog jacks on this unit.

Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the

left jacks.

Digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital

signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You

can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both

the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to

the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital

input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital

signals.

This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus

audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the

analog OUT (REC) jacks.

[ HTR-5750 only ] Likewise audio signals input to the digital

(OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the DIGITAL

OUTPUT jack.

Dust protection cap

Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect

the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are

not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in

place. This cap protects the jack from dust.

Video jacks

[ HTR-5750 ]

This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.

The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit

are automatically converted for output through the VIDEO

jacks. When V CONV. is set to ON (see page 49), signals

input through the VIDEO jacks can be output through the

S VIDEO jacks.

[ HTR-5740 ]

This unit has two types of video jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.

VIDEO jack

For conventional composite video signals.

S VIDEO jack ( HTR-5750 only )

For S-Video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color

reproduction.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in

picture reproduction.

[ HTR-5750 only ] When signals are input through both the S

VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO

jack have priority.

CONNECTIONS

Before connecting components

Note

CAUTION

S

V

O

V

L

R

C

left analog cables

right analog cables

optical cables

coaxial cables

video cables

S-Video cables

For analog signals

For digital signals

For video signals

Note

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

R

P

B

Y

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

R

P

B

Y

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 13 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

14

CONNECTIONS

Connections for DVD playback

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Signal flow inside this unit (HTR-5750)

Only when V CONV. is set to ON

(see page 49).

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Input

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Signal flow inside this unit (HTR-5740)

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Input

Connecting video components

MONITOR OUT

AUDIO

VIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

VIDEO

RL

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

PR

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

PB Y

DVD

S VIDEO

LR

O

DVD player

Video

monitor

(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)

Optical out Video out

Audio out

Video in

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 14 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

15

English

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and

SUB WOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-

amplifier.

Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to

match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.

When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you

cannot select sound field programs.

This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that

you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.

When headphones are used, only front left and right channels are output.

Notes

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

SURROUND

RL

LR

LR

Multi-format player/

External decoder

Front

out

Surround

out

Subwoofer

out

Center

out

(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 15 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

16

CONNECTIONS

Connections for other video components

VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a

game console or video camera, to this unit.

AUDIO

VIDEO

S VIDEO

DTV

/CBL

VIDEO

RL

OUT

VCR

IN

COMPONENT VIDEO

PR

DTV

/CBL

PB Y

DIGITAL

INPUT

DTV/CBL

CD

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

O

LR

LR LR

Cable TV or

satellite tuner

(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)

DVD recorder

or VCR

Audio out

Video out

Optical out

Audio out Video out

Video in

Audio in

VIDEO L AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

V

L

R

Game

console or

video camera

Video out

Audio out L

Audio out R

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 16 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

17

English

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Connections for audio components

Connecting audio components

AUDIO

RL

IN

(PLAY)

(REC)

MD

/CD-R

CD

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

OPTICAL

MD/CD-R

CD

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

MD/CD-R

L

R

LR LR

O O

C

CD player

MD recorder or

tape deck

(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)

Coaxial out

Audio out

Audio in

Audio out

Optical in

Optical out

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 17 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

18

CONNECTIONS

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this

unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient

signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the

designated terminals.

Connecting the AM loop antenna

1Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it

to the terminals on this unit.

2Press and hold the tab to insert

the AM loop antenna lead wires

into the AM ANT and GND

terminals.

3Orient the AM loop antenna

for the best reception.

The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an

outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest

authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor

antennas.

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter

(U.K. model only)

1Open the cover of the

included 75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter.

2Cut the external sleeve

of the 75-ohm coaxial

cable and prepare it for

connection.

3Cut the lead wire and

remove it.

4Insert the cable

wire into the slot,

and clamp it with

pliers.

5Snap the cover

into place.

Connecting the antennas

TUNER

AM

ANT

GND

FM

ANT

75 UNBAL.

AM loop antenna

(included)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum interference,

connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth

ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven

into moist earth.

Indoor FM antenna

(included)

(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)

Notes

11 (7/16)

8 (5/16)

6 (1/14)

Unit:

mm (in.)

Lead wire

Clamp

Clamp

Insert wire into

slot.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 18 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

19

English

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Connecting the AC power cord

Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.

AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.K. and Australia models………….…………..… 1 OUTLET

Korea model..………..………..………..…………..……….. None

Other models…………………….…………..……….. 2 OUTLETS

Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your

other components to this unit. Power to the AC

OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON

(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). The outlet(s)

supply power to any connected component whenever this

unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power

consumption of components) that can be connected to the

AC OUTLET(S) is:

Korea model..………..………..………..…………..………..….. N/A

Other models ….………..…………………..………………… 100 W

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from

being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC

wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one

week, the stored data will be lost.

Connecting the power supply cord

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 19 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

20

CONNECTIONS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

Do not change the setting of the IMPEDANCE

SELECTOR switch when the unit power is switched on,

as doing so may damage the unit.

If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON is pressed

on either the front panel or remote control, the

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to

either position. If this is the case, slide the switch all the

way to either position when this unit is in standby mode.

Select the switch position (left or right) according to the

impedance of the speakers in your system.

*The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems (A and B) simultaneously when the switch is set to the right position.

CAUTION

SET BEFORE POWER ON

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

Switch position Speaker Impedance level

Left

Front

If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be

4 or higher.

If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be

8 or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 6 or higher.Center, Surround, Surround back

Right

Front

If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be

8 or higher.

If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be

16 or higher.*

The impedance of each speaker must be 8 or higher.Center, Surround, Surround back

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 20 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

21

English

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

When all connections are complete, turn on the power of

this unit.

1Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the

remote control) to turn on the power of this

unit.

2Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

Turning on the power

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

1

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

1

(U.S.A. model)

STANDBY

/ON

SYSTEM

POWER

or

Front panel Remote control

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 21 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

BASIC SETUP

22

The basic setup feature is a useful way to set up your

system quickly and with minimal effort.

y

If you wish to configure the unit manually using more precise

adjustments, use the detailed parameters in SOUND MENU

(page 46) instead of using BASIC SETUP.

Altering any parameters in BASIC SETUP will reset all

parameters in SOUND MENU.

Before you begin:

Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel to select

the main speakers you want to use.

Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this

unit.

1Press AMP.

2Press SET MENU.

“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.

3Press SELECT to enter BASIC SETUP.

The ROOM parameter appears in the front panel

display.

4Press j / i to select the desired setting.

ROOM: S M >L

Select the size of the room you have installed your

speakers in. Roughly speaking, the room sizes are

defined as follows:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

S (small) 16 x 13ft, 200ft2 (4.8 x 4.0m, 20m2)

M (medium) 20 x 16ft, 300ft2 (6.3 x 5.0m, 30m2)

L (large) 26 x 19ft, 450ft2 (7.9 x 5.8m, 45m2)

[Other models]

S (small) 3.6 x 2.8m, 10m2

M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0m, 20m2

L (large) 6.3 x 5.0m, 30m2

5Press d to display the SUBWOOFER

parameter.

6 Press j / i to select the desired setting.

YES If you have a subwoofer in your system.

NONE If you do not have a subwoofer in your system.

BASIC SETUP

Using the BASIC SETUP menu

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

FREQ/RDS EONSTART

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

MODE PTY SEEK

TEST

STRAIGHT

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

SELECT

PRESET/CH

13-13

2

AMP

MENU

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

BASIC SETUP

SELECT

PRESET/CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

SUBWOOFER YES

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 22 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

23

English

BASIC SETUP

PREPARATION

7Press d to display the SPEAKERS

parameter.

8Press j / i to select the number of speakers

you connected.

SPEAKERS 6spk

9Press d to display SET/CANCEL.

10 Press j / i to select the desired setting.

>SET CANCEL

SET To apply the settings you chose in steps

4 through 8.

CANCEL To cancel the setup without making any

changes.

11 Press SELECT to confirm your selection.

If you selected SET, you hear a test tone from each

speaker in turn. “CHECK:Test Tone” appears in the

front panel display for a few seconds, then “CHECK:

OK?”.

CHECK:TestTone

CHECK OK? YES

12 Press j / i to select the desired setting.

CHECK OK? YES

YES To complete the setup process if the test tone

levels from each speaker were satisfactory.

NO To proceed to the SP LEVEL speaker level

adjustment menu to balance the level of each

speaker.

13 Press SELECT to confirm your selection.

If you selected NO in step 12, the front speaker level

adjustment display appears in the front panel display.

Choices Display Speakers

2spk

Front L/R

3spk

Front L/R, Center

4spk

Front L/R, Surround L/R

5spk

Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R

6spk

Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,

Surround back

SELECT

PRESET/CH

LL CR

SL SB SR

LL CR

SL SB SR

LL CR

SL SB SR

LL CR

SL SB SR

LL C R

SL SB

SR

LL C R

SL SB SR

SELECT

PRESET/CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 23 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

24

BASIC SETUP

To balance the speaker levels

Perform the following steps after step 13 (see page 23).

The unit outputs the test tone from the selected speaker

and the left front (or left surround) speaker in turn. The

indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test tone

flashes in the front panel display.

1Press d / u to select a speaker, then use j / i

to adjust the balance.

FR——||——

Adjusts the balance between the front left and right

speakers.

C——||——

Adjusts the balance between the front left and center

speakers.

SL——||——

Adjusts the balance between the front left and

surround left speakers.

SB——||——

Adjusts the balance between the surround left and

surround back speakers.

SR——||——

Adjusts the balance between the surround left and

surround right speakers.

SWFR——||——

Adjusts the balance between the front left speaker

and the subwoofer.

2Press SET MENU to exit after balancing the

speakers.

y

You can also balance the speaker levels using test tone by

pressing TEST on the remote control.

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LR

SB

q

DIGITAL

t

FR——||——

C

SL SR

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, if the power cord is disconnected from the

AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one

week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the

items again.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 24 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

PLAYBACK

25

English

BASIC

OPERATION

1Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the

remote control) to turn on the power.

2Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

3Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel.

Each press turns the respective speakers on or off.

4Select the input source.

Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons

on the remote control) to select the input you desire.

The current input source name and input mode appear

in the front panel display and video monitor for a few

seconds.

5Start playback or select a broadcast station

on the source component.

Refer to the operating instructions for the component.

6Adjust the volume to the desired output level.

PLAYBACK

Basic operations

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

1 7 43 6

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

MUTE

VOLUME

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

PRESET/CH

7

6

1

4

7

(U.S.A. model)

STANDBY

/ON

SYSTEM

POWER

Front panel Remote control

or

SPEAKERS

B

A

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

INPUT

Front panel

Remote control

or

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

01DDVDDAUTO00

Selected input source Input mode

VOLUME

VOLUME

or

Remote control

Front panel

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 25 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

26

PLAYBACK

7Select a sound field program if desired.

Press PROGRAM l / h repeatedly (or press AMP

on the remote control to select the AMP mode, then

press one of the sound field program buttons

repeatedly) to select a sound field program. (See

page 39 for details about sound field programs.)

To listen with headphones (SILENT CINEMA)

“SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS

surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT

CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect

headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to

CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When

activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in

the front panel display.

This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI

CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

“SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when the Direct Stereo or

2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode.

To adjust the tone

You can adjust the tonal quality

of your front left and right

speakers or headphones (when

connected).

Press CONTROL on the front

panel repeatedly to select

TREBLE or BASS, then press

BASS/TREBLE –/+ repeatedly to

increase or decrease.

Select TREBLE to adjust the

high frequency response.

Select BASS to adjust the low

frequency response.

To cancel the tone control, press CONTROL repeatedly to

select BYPASS.

y

Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.

If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-frequency

sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround

speakers may not match that of the front left and right speakers.

CONTROL is not effective with the Direct Stereo program

(page 30) or MULTI CH INPUT.

To mute the sound

Press MUTE on the remote control.

The MUTE indicator blinks in the

front panel display.

To resume the audio output, press

MUTE again (or press VOLUME –/+).

The MUTE indicator disappears from

the display.

y

You can adjust the muting level (see page 48).

Notes

l PROGRAM h

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

AMP

Remote control

Front panel

or

Notes

CONTROL

BASS/TREBLE

MUTE

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 26 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

27

English

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

Selecting MULTI CH INPUT

Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT”

appears in the front panel display and video monitor.

MULTI CH INPUT

When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display,

no other source can be played. To select another input source with

INPUT (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH

INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” in the front panel

display.

Playing video sources in the

background

You can combine a video image from a video source with

sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy

listening to classical music while viewing beautiful

scenery from the video source on the video monitor.

Use the input selector buttons on the remote

control to select a video source, then select an

audio source.

If you want to enjoy audio from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks

together with a video source, first select the video source, then

press MULTI CH INPUT.

Front panel operation

Press PROGRAM l / h repeatedly to select the

desired program.

The name of the selected program appears in the front

panel display and video monitor.

Note

Note

MULTI CH

INPUT

MULTI CH IN

Front panel Remote control

or

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

Audio sources

Video sources

Selecting sound field programs

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

PROGRAM

(U.S.A. model)

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

01DJAZZACLUBO00

Program name

l PROGRAM h

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 27 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

28

PLAYBACK

Remote control operation

Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press

one of the sound field program buttons

repeatedly to select the desired program.

The name of the selected program appears in the front

panel display.

y

Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening

preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.

When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with that source.

Sound field programs cannot be selected when MULTI CH

INPUT is selected.

Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/

24 signals) will be sampled down to 48 kHz, then sound field

programs will be applied.

Enjoying multi-channel software

If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature

to enjoy 6.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources

using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital Surround

EX or DTS-ES decoders.

Press AMP on the remote control to select the

AMP mode, then press EX/ES to switch between

5.1 and 6.1-channel playback.

To select a decoder, press j / i repeatedly while

PLIIxMusic (etc.) is displayed.

AUTO (AUTO)

When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is

input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing

back the signal in 6.1 channels.

If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in

the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1

channels.

Decoders (select with j / i)

You can select from the following decoders depending on

the format of the software you are playing.

PLIIxMusic

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1

channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder.

EX/ES

For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1 channels

using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder.

DTS signals are played back in 6.1 channels using the

DTS-ES decoder.

EX

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1

channels using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder.

OFF (OFF)

Decoders are not used to create 6.1 channels.

Notes

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHT

q/DTS

EFFECT

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

Sound field

program

buttons

AMP

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

01DJAZZACLUBO00

AMP

Program name

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

10

EX/ES

AMP

SELECT

PRESET/CH

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 28 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

29

English

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)

which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these

kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select a decoder manually

(PLIIx Music, EX/ES or EX).

6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EX/ES is pressed in

the following cases:

When “SURR LR” (see page 46) or “SURR B” (see page 46)

is set to NONE.

When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is

being played.

When the source being played does not contain surround left

and right channel signals.

When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

When “2ch Stereo” or “Direct Stereo” is selected.

When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be

reset to AUTO.

When the DTS-ES decoder is applied to DTS 96/24 signals, you

cannot use the DTS 96/24 decoding feature.

The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SURR B” is

set to NONE (see page 46).

Enjoying 2-channel software

Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played

back on multiple channels.

Press q/DTS on the remote control to select the

decoder.

You can select from the following decoders depending on

the type of software you are playing and your personal

preference.

PRO LOGIC SUR. STANDARD

Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.

PRO LOGIC SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround

sources.

PRO LOGIC IIx Movie*

Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for movie software.

PRO LOGIC IIx Music*

Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for music software.

PRO LOGIC IIx Game*

Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for game software.

DTS Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie software.

DTS Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music software.

*Use the PLII/PLIIx parameter to select the Pro Logic II or Pro

Logic IIx decoders (see page 40).

The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SURR B” is set

to NONE (see page 46).

Notes

Note

9

q/DTS

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 29 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

30

PLAYBACK

Listening to high fidelity stereo sound

(Direct Stereo)

Direct Stereo allows you to bypass this unit’s decoders and

DSP processors to enjoy pure high fidelity sound from 2-

channel PCM and analog sources.

Press PROGRAM l / h repeatedly (or press

AMP to select the AMP mode, then press

STEREO repeatedly) to select “Direct Stereo”.

Direct Stereo

To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in

this mode.

When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input,

this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog

input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will

be heard.)

No sound will be output from the subwoofer.

CONTROL (page 26) and SET MENU (page 44) settings are

not effective.

The front panel display automatically dims.

Night listening modes

The night listening modes are designed to improve

listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either

NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the

type of material you are playing.

Press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to

select cinema or music.

When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in

the front panel display lights up.

Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.

Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources

to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

Select OFF if you do not want to use this function.

Press j / i to adjust the effect level while

NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed.

This adjusts the level of compression.

Select MIN for minimum compression.

Select MID for standard compression.

Select MAX for maximum compression.

y

NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored

independently.

You cannot use the night listening modes with the Direct Stereo

program or MULTI CH INPUT (even though the NIGHT

indicator lights up when Direct Stereo is selected).

The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending

on the input source and surround sound settings you use.

Notes

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

AMP

Front panel

or

l PROGRAM h

Remote control

Notes

0

NIGHT

Remote control

SELECT

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Effect.Lvl:MID

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 30 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

31

English

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

Downmixing to 2 channels

You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback even from multi-

channel sources.

Press PROGRAM l / h repeatedly (or press

STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch

Stereo.

2ch Stereo

y

You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or

BOTH is selected in “BASS OUT”.

Listening to unprocessed input signals

In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are

output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-

channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate

channels without any additional effect processing.

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select STRAIGHT.

STRAIGHT

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) again so that “STRAIGHT”

disappears from the display when you want to turn the

sound effect back on.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates

virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.

If you do not connect surround speakers, Virtual CINEMA

DSP activates automatically whenever you select a

CINEMA DSP sound field program.

Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when “SURR LR”

is set to NONE (see page 46) in the following cases:

When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the

following to select the type of input signals you want to

use.

1Rotate INPUT to select the input source.

2Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode.

In most cases, use AUTO.

AUTO Automatically selects input signals in

the following order:

1) Digital signals*

2) Analog signals

DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in

DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no

sound is output.

ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no

analog signals are input, no sound is

output.

* If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the

decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound

field program.

y

You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the

power is turned on (see page 49).

Note

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

Front panel

or

l PROGRAM h

Remote control

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

STRAIGHT

ENTER

EFFECT

Front panel Remote control

or

Selecting input modes

INPUT

INPUT MODE

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

01DDVDDAUTO00

Input modeInput source

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 31 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

32

PLAYBACK

When you play DTS-encoded CD/LDs with the input mode set

to AUTO:

This unit automatically switches to the DTS decoding mode.

The unit remains in DTS mode (and the t indicator may

flash) for up to 30 seconds after playback of the DTS source is

complete. To manually release the DTS mode, press INPUT

MODE to reselect AUTO.

The DTS decoding mode may be released if search or skip

operations are performed for more than 30 seconds. To

prevent this, press INPUT MODE to select DTS.

If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any

way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you

make a digital connection between this unit and the player.

Displaying the information about the input

source

You can display the type, format and sampling frequency

of the current input signal.

1Select the input source.

2Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then

press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) so that

“STRAIGHT” appears in the display.

STRAIGHT

3Press u / d to display the following

information about the input signal.

(Format) Signal format display. When the unit

cannot detect a digital signal it

automatically switches to analog input.

in Number of source channels in the input

signal. For example, a multi-channel

soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2

surround channels and LFE, is

displayed as “3/2/LFE”.

fs Sampling frequency. When the unit is

unable to detect the sampling

frequency “Unknown” appears.

rate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to

detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears.

flg Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby

Digital signals that cue this unit to

automatically switch decoders.

Notes

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

STRAIGHT

ENTER

EFFECT

AMP

then

SELECT

PRESET/CH

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 32 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

TUNING

33

English

BASIC

OPERATION

There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

Automatic tuning

1Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input

source.

2Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the

front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to

turn the colon (:) off.

4Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin

automatic tuning.

Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l

to tune into a lower frequency.

When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator

lights up and the frequency of the received station is

shown in the front panel display.

TUNING

Automatic and manual tuning

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

3 312 4

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

Front panel

FM/AM

or AM

FM

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

TUNING MODE

AUTO

Lights up

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

TUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

T CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO ME

SLEEP

UAL

A B

SP

A

-AAM11440kkHz

TUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

T CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO ME

SLEEP

UAL

A B

SP

A

-AAM11530kkHz

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 33 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

34

TUNING

Manual tuning

If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,

tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station

will automatically switch the tuner to monaural reception

to increase the signal quality.

1Select TUNER and the reception band

following steps 1 and 2 as described in

“Automatic tuning”.

2Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the AUTO indicator disappears from

the front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to

turn the colon (:) off.

3Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into

the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to

continue searching.

Automatically presetting FM stations

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations. This function enables this unit to

automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals,

and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through

E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any

preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.

1Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

2Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the

front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to

turn the colon (:) off.

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

TUNING MODE

AUTO

Disappears

TUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

T CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO ME

SLEEP

UAL

A B

SP

A

-AAM11440kkHz

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

Presetting stations

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

231

(U.S.A. model)

FM/AM

FM

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

TUNING MODE

AUTO

Lights up

TUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

T CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO ME

SLEEP

UAL

A B

SP

A

-AAM11440kkHz

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 34 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

35

English

TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

3Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

for more than 3 seconds.

The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO

indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic

presetting starts from the frequency currently

displayed and proceeds toward the higher

frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8),

automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after

searching all stations.

Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually

and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting

stations”.

Automatic preset tuning options

You can select the preset number from which this unit will

store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower

frequencies.

After pressing MEMORY in step 3:

1Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to

select the preset number under which the first station

will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when

stations have all been stored up to E8.

2Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon

(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin

tuning toward the lower frequencies.

Manually presetting stations

You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups)

manually.

1Tune into a station.

See page 33 for tuning instructions.

When tuned into a station, the front panel display

shows the frequency of the station received.

2Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.

3Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset

station group (A to E) while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)

appears in the front panel display.

Notes

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If

so, store the stations again by using the presetting

station methods.

MAN’L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

A11:FM187.5kMHz

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

43 2,5

(U.S.A. model)

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

A11:AM18630kkHz

MAN’L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MEMORY

Flashes

NEXT

A/B/C/D/E

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

C11:AM18630kkHz

Preset group

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 35 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

36

TUNING

4Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a

preset station number (1 through 8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

Press h to select a higher preset station number.

Press l to select a lower preset station number.

5Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the

front panel while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The station band and

frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset

group and number you have

selected.

6Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the

preset station number under which it was stored.

When performing this operation with the remote

control, first press TUNER to set the remote to

tuner mode.

1Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station

group.

The preset group letter appears in the front panel

display and changes each time you press the button.

2Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET/CH

u / d on the remote control) to select a

preset station number (1 to 8).

The preset group and number appear in the front

panel display along with the station band, frequency

and the TUNED indicator lights up.

Notes

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

C13:AM18630kkHz

Preset number

MAN’L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

C13:AM18630kkHz

Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.

Selecting preset stations

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

2

1

REC

AUDI O

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

1009

ENTER

EX/ESNIGHT

q/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

SELECT

PRESET/CH

2

1

(U.S.A. model)

NEXT

A/B/C/D/E

MENU

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

or

Front panel Remote control

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

E11:FM187.5kMHz

SELECT

PRESET/CH

or

Front panel

Remote control

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 36 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

37

English

TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E

and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

See “Selecting preset stations”.

2Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for

more than 3 seconds.

“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

3Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E

and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

4Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset assignments are

exchanged.

Exchanging preset stations

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

2,4 1,31,3

(U.S.A. model)

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

E11:FM187.5kMHz

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

A15:FM190.6kMHz

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

NEXT

A/B/C/D/E

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

E1 EDIT18E1-A5Hz

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 37 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

RECORDING

38

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed from the recording components. Refer to the

operating instructions for those components.

1Turn on the power of this unit and all

connected components.

2Select the source component you want to

record from.

3Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4Start recording on the recording component.

y

Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record

between other components connected to this unit.

The setting of CONTROL, VOLUME, “SP LEVEL” (page 47)

and the sound field programs does not affect recorded material.

A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit

cannot be recorded.

[ HTR-5750 only ] S-Video and composite video signals pass

independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore,

when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source

component is connected to provide only an S-Video (or only a

composite video) signal, you can record only an S-Video (or

only a composite video) signal to your VCR.

[ HTR-5750 ] Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT

jacks are not output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for

recording. Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN

(L/R) jacks are not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.

Therefore, if your source component is connnected to provide

only digital (or analog) signals, you can only record digital (or

analog) signals.

[ HTR-5740 ] Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT

jacks are not output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for

recording. You can only record analog signals.

A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT

channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR IN is not

output on VCR OUT.)

Check the copyright laws in your country to record from

records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may

infringe copyright laws.

Special considerations when recording

DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player

is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operating

instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will

be output from the player.

RECORDING

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

12

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

1

2

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

or

Front panel Remote control

Notes

If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 38 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

39

English

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multichannel playback from

almost any sound source (stereo or multichannel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field

processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous

concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.

y

The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to

AUTO (see page 31) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.

This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in

the actual hall, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.

Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.

You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”

can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel

(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

Notes

For movie/video sources

Program Features Sources

STEREO:

2ch Stereo

Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channels (left and right) or plays back 2-channel

sources as is.

MULTI

2-CH

MUSIC VIDEO This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling you are at

an actual jazz or rock concert.

ENTERTAINMENT:

Game

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.

TV THEATER:

Mono Movie

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The

program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presernce

sound field.

TV THEATER:

Variety/Sports

Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the

sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching

various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs.

MOVIE THEATER:

Spectacle

CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm

movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the

sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby

Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).

MOVIE THEATER:

Sci-Fi

CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the

latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space

amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced

techniques.

MOVIE THEATER:

Adventure

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of

the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to

that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained

as much as possible.

MOVIE THEATER:

General

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and

multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 39 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

40

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

*You can select either Pro Logic IIx or Pro Logic II processing using the PLII/PLIIx parameter on page 58.

DOLBY DIGITAL:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 5.1-channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

MULTI

DOLBY DIGITAL:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources.

DOLBY D EX:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1-channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

DOLBY D EX:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital

sources.

DTS:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 5.1-channel processing for DTS sources.

DTS 96/24:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 5.1-channel processing for 96-kHz/24-bit DTS sources.

DTS:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS and 96-kHz/24-bit DTS sources.

DTS+DOLBY EX:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.

DTS+DOLBY EX:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Mtrx6.1:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1-channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Mtrx6.1:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Disc6.1:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1-channel processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Disc6.1:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources.

PRO LOGIC:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.

2-CH

PRO LOGIC:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround sources.

PRO LOGIC IIx:

PLIIx Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.*

PRO LOGIC II:

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.*

PRO LOGIC IIx:

PLIIx Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.*

PRO LOGIC II:

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.*

DTS: Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software.

Program Features Sources

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 40 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

41

English

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.

*You can select either Pro Logic IIx or Pro Logic II processing using the PLII/PLIIx parameter on page 58.

For music sources

Program Features Sources

CONCERT HALL HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats.

Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full,

rich sound.

MULTI

2-CH

JAZZ CLUB HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous

New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering

a real and vibrant sound.

ROCK CONCERT HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this

program was recorded at LAs “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left

of the hall.

ENTERTAINMENT:

Disco

HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the

heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-

energy, “immediate” sound.

q D+PLIIx Music:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

MULTI

q D+PLIIx Music:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

DTS+PLIIx Music:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

DTS+PLIIx Music:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

STEREO:

2ch Stereo

2-channel (left and right) playback.

2-CH

STEREO:

Direct Stereo

Use to output stereo sources to only the front left and right speakers without any processing.

STEREO:

6ch Stereo

Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.

PRO LOGIC IIx:

PLIIx Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.*

PRO LOGIC II:

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.*

DTS: Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 41 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

42

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to the AC OUTLET(S).

Setting the sleep timer

1Select a source and start playback on the

source component.

2Press SLEEP repeatedly to set

the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front

panel display changes as shown

below. The SLEEP indicator flashes

while switching the amount of time

for the sleep timer.

The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel

display, and the display returns to the selected sound

field program.

Canceling the sleep timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in

the front panel display.

After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the

SLEEP indicator goes off.

y

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front

panel) to set this unit to the standby mode.

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Using the sleep timer

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

2

SLEEP

SLEEP 90min

SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF

SLEEP 120min

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

E1 SLEEP8120minz

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

E1 CONCERT2HALLz

SLEEP indicator

SLEEP SLEEP OFF

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 42 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

43

English

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while

listening to a music source. This is also possible when

playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

Please note that this operation will override the level

adjustments made in “BASIC SETUP” (page 22), “SP

LEVEL” (page 47) and “Using the test tone” (page 43).

1Press AMP.

2Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the

speaker you want to adjust.

FRONT L Front left speaker level

CENTER Center speaker level

FRONT R Front right speaker level

SUR.R Surround right speaker level

SUR.B Surround back speaker level

SUR.L Surround left speaker level

SWFR Subwoofer level

y

Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by

pressing u / d.

3Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.

The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB.

4Press SELECT when you have completed

your adjustment.

y

This operation can also be performed using the controls on the

front panel. Press NEXT repeatedly to select the speaker you

want to adjust, then press LEVEL –/+ to adjust the output level.

You can use the test tone feature to manually balance your

speaker levels. Please note that this operation will override

the level adjustments made in “BASIC SETUP” (page 22),

“SP LEVEL” (page 47) and “Manually adjusting speaker

levels” (page 43). Use the test tone to set speaker levels so

that the volume from each speaker is identical when heard

from your listening position.

You cannot activate the test tone if headphones are connected to

the PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES

jack.

1Press AMP.

2Press TEST.

The unit outputs a test tone.

3Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker

you want to adjust.

TEST LEFT Front left speaker

TEST CENTER Center speaker

TEST RIGHT Front right speaker

TEST SUR.R Right surround speaker

TEST SUR.B Surround back speaker

TEST SUR.L Left surround speaker

TEST SUBWOOFER Subwoofer

4Press j / i to adjust speaker volumes.

5Press TEST when you have completed your

adjustment.

The test tone stops.

Manually adjusting speaker levels

AMP

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

VCR

PRESET/CH

SELECT

3

4

2

1

Using the test tone

Note

AMP

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHT

q/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

VCR

PRESET/CH

3,4

2,5

1

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 43 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

SET MENU

44

You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this

unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening

environment.

BASIC SETUP

Use to quickly setup basic system parameters (see page 22).

MANUAL SETUP

Use to adjust speaker and system settings.

1 SOUND MENU

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for

video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.

y

Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you perform “BASIC SETUP” (see page 22). You can

use SOUND MENU to make further adjustments.

2 INPUT MENU

Use to reassign digital input/outputs and select the input mode.

3 OPTION MENU

Use to adjust the optional system parameters.

SET MENU

Item Features Page

A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over

frequency. 46

B)SP LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 47

C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 47

D)CENTER GEQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 47

E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 47

F)D. RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 47

G)AUDIO SET Customizes the muting level and audio delay. 48

Item Features Page

A)I/O ASSIGN Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 48

B)INPUT MODE Selects the initial input mode of the source. 49

Item Features Page

A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. 49

B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings. 49

C)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 50

D)ZONE SET Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. 50

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 44 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

45

English

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

y

You can change SET MENU parameters while the unit is

reproducing sound.

You cannot change some SET MENU parameters while the unit

is in either cinema or music night listening mode.

1Press AMP.

2Press SET MENU.

“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.

3Press u / d to display MANUAL SETUP.

MANUAL SETUP

4Press SELECT to enter MANUAL SETUP.

1 SOUND MENU appears in the front panel display.

1 SOUND MENU

5Press u / d to display the desired menu.

1 SOUND MENU

2 INPUT MENU

3 OPTION MENU

6Press SELECT to enter the displayed menu.

Repeat steps 5 and 6 to navigate to and enter the items

you want to adjust.

To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN.

7Press u / d to select the item you want to

adjust, then press j / i to change the setting

of the item.

Repeat this operation to select and adjust each setting.

To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN.

8To exit, press SET MENU when finished.

Using SET MENU

Note

AMP

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHT

q/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

VCR

PRESET/CH

3-7

1

2,8

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, if the power cord is disconnected from the

AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one

week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the

items again.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 45 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

46

SET MENU

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate

for video signal processing delays when using LCD

monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU

parameters are set automatically when you perform

“BASIC SETUP” (see page 22).

Speaker set A)SPEAKER SET

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.

y

If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,

you can change these settings according to your preference.

Center speaker CENTER

Choices: LRG, SML, NONE

Select LRG if you have a large center speaker. The unit

directs the entire range of the center channel signal to

the center speaker.

Select SML if you have a small center speaker. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center

channel to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”.

Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The

unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front

left and right speakers.

Front speakers FRONT

Choices: LARGE, SMALL

Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The

unit directs the entire range of the front left and right

channel signals to the front left and right speakers.

Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front

channel to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”.

Surround left/right speakers SURR LR

Choices: LRG, SML, NONE

Select LRG if you have large surround left and right

speakers. The entire range of the surround channel

signal is directed to the surround left and right

speakers.

Select SML if you have small surround left and right

speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround

channel are directed to the speakers selected with

“BASS OUT”.

Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers.

This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP

mode (see page 31) and automatically set the surround

back speaker setting (SURR B) to NONE.

Surround back speaker SURR B

Choices: LRG, SML, NONE

Select LRG if you have a large surround back speaker.

Select SML if you have a small surround back speaker.

The low-frequency signals of the surround back

channel are directed to the speakers selected with

“BASS OUT”, and the rest of the frequency signals are

directed to the surround back speaker.

Select NONE if you do not have a surround back

speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back

channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.

Bass out BASS OUT

Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the

subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers

according to the characteristics of your system. This

setting also determines the routing of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS

sources.

Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRONT, BOTH

Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and

low-frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings.

Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and

low-frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the front speakers according to the speaker settings

(even if you have previously set the front speakers to

SMALL).

Select BOTH if you connect a subwoofer and you want

to output low-frequency signals from front channels to

both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and low-

frequency signals from other channels are also directed

to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use

this function to reinforce low-frequency signals using

the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs.

Cross over CrossOver

Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency

for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the

selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer.

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

Subwoofer phase SWFR PHASE

If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to

switch the phase of your subwoofer.

Choices: NRM (normal), REV (reverse)

Select NRM if you do not want to reverse the phase of

your subwoofer.

Select REV to reverse the phase of your subwoofer.

1 SOUND MENU

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 46 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

47

English

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Speaker level B)SP LEVEL

Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels

between the front left or surround left speakers and each

speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 46).

Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

FR adjusts the balance of the front left and front right

speakers.

C adjusts the balance of the front left and center

speakers.

SL adjusts the balance of the front left and surround

left speakers.

SB adjusts the balance of the surround left and

surround back speakers.

SR adjusts the balance of the surround left and

surround right speakers.

SWFR adjusts the balance of the front left speaker and

subwoofer.

y

To calibrate, use the test tone feature (see page 43).

Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE

Use this feature to manually input the distance of each

speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in

most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay

must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all

sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time.

Unit UNIT

Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)

Initial setting:

U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft)

Other models: meters (m)

Select meters to input speaker distances in meters.

Select feet to input speaker distances in feet.

Speaker distances

Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft)

FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.

Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker.

Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

SURR L adjusts the distance of the surround left

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

SURR R adjusts the distance of the surround right

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

SURR B adjusts the distance of the surround back

speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)

SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial

setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ

Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic

equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of

the center speaker matches that of the left and right main

speakers. You can make adjustments listening to the

currently selected source component or a test tone.

You can adjust 5 frequency bands:

100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz, 10kHz

Choices: –6 to +6 dB

Select ON to output test tones from the front left and

center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the

center speaker.

Select OFF to stop the test tone and output the

currently selected source component.

Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL

Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency

effect) channel according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-

frequency special effects which are only added to certain

scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit

decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Choices: –20 to 0 dB

Speaker SP LFE

Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.

Headphone HP LFE

Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the “LFE LEVEL” setting, some signals may not

be output from the SUB WOOFER OUTPUT jack.

Dynamic range F)D. RANGE

Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to

be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is

effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and

DTS signals.

Choices: MAX (maximum), STD (standard), MIN

(minimum)

Speaker SP D.R

Select to adjust the speaker compression.

Headphone HP D.R

Select to adjust the headphone compression.

Select MAX for feature films.

Select STD for general use.

Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume

levels.

Note

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 47 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

48

SET MENU

Audio set G)AUDIO SET

Use to customize this units overall audio settings.

Audio mute A.MUTE

Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the

output volume.

Choices: MUTE, –20 dB

Select MUTE to completely halt all output of sound.

Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.

Audio delay A.DELAY

Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the

video image. This may be necessary when using certain

LCD monitors or projectors.

Choices: 0 to 160 mS

Use to reassign digital input/outputs and select the input

mode.

Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGN

You can assign jacks according to the component to be

used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your

needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the

respective jacks and effectively connect more components.

Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the

corresponding component by using INPUT on the front

panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control.

For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A (C.V[A]) and B

(C.V[B])

Choices: DVD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR

[ HTR-5750 ]

For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 (OUT(1))

Choices: MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVD

For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2 (IN(2)), 3 (IN(3))

and 4 (IN(4))

Choices: CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVD,

MD/CD-R

For COAXIAL INPUT jack 5 (IN(5))

Choices: CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVD,

MD/CD-R

[ HTR-5740 ]

For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 1 (IN(1)) and

2 (IN(2))

Choices: CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVD,

MD/CD-R

For COAXIAL INPUT jack 3 (IN(3))

Choices: CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVD,

MD/CD-R

You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the

COAXIAL jack.

2 INPUT MENU

Notes

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 48 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

49

English

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Input mode B)INPUT MODE

Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on

this unit (see page 31 for details about the input mode).

Choices: AUTO, LAST

Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect

the type of input signal and select the appropriate input

mode.

Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the

last input mode used for that source.

Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EX/ES button

will not be recalled.

Use to adjust the optional system parameters.

Display set A)DISPLAY SET

Dimmer DIMMER

Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

Choices: –4 to 0

Video conversion (HTR-5750 only) V CONV.

Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite

(VIDEO) signals to S-Video signals. This allows you to

output converted video signals from the S VIDEO jacks

when no S-Video signals are input.

Choices: ON, OFF

Select OFF not to convert any signals.

Select ON to convert composite signals to S-Video

signals.

Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT

jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video

connections (i.e., S-Video) between each component.

Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other system settings.

Choices: ON, OFF

Select ON to protect:

DSP program parameters

All SET MENU items

All speaker levels

When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use

the test tone or select any other SET MENU items.

Note

3 OPTION MENU

Note

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 49 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

50

SET MENU

Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI

Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound

field program within a sound field program group. When

you initialize a sound field program group, all of the

parameter values within that group revert to their initial

settings.

Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound field

program that you want to initialize.

An asterisk (*) next to a program number means that the

parameter values have been changed from their initial

settings.

You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter

settings once you initialize a sound field program group.

You cannot separately initialize individual sound field

programs.

You cannot initialize any program groups when “MEMORY

GUARD” is set to ON.

Zone set D)ZONE SET

Use to specify the location of speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS B terminals.

Speaker B set SP B

Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers

connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.

Choices: FRONT, ZONE B

Select FRONT to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B

when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B

terminals are set in the main room.

Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If

SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is

turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in

the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound

from SPEAKERS B only.

If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit

when “SP B” is set to ZONE B, the sound is output from both

headphones and SPEAKERS B.

If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to ZONE B,

the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.

Notes

Notes

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 50 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

51

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and

other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up remote control with the appropriate manufacturer

codes.

Controlling this unit

The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit

when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to activate

the AMP mode.

Controlling other components

The shaded areas below can be used to control other

components. Each button has a different function

depending on the selected components. Select the

component you want to control by pressing an input

selector button.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Control area

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

DISC SKIP

FREQ/RDS EONSTART

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

MODE PTY SEEK

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

SELECT

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

PRESET/CH

The buttons in the

dotted lines

(SYSTEM

POWER,

STANDBY,

SLEEP, MULTI CH

IN, VOLUME +/–

and MUTE)

function in any

mode.

Press AMP to

control this unit.

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

DISC SKIP

FREQ/RDS EONSTART

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

MODE PTY SEEK

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

SELECT

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

FREQ/RDS EONSTARTMODE PTY SEEK

/ buttons and the

input selector buttons switch

the function of the

component control area

below.

* Use the / buttons to

control other components

regardless of whether they

are connected to this unit.

Component control

area

You can control up to 9

different components by

setting appropriate

manufacturer codes (see

page 52).

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 51 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

52

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate manufacturer codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area. For a complete list of available

manufacturer codes, refer to “LIST OF

MANUFACTURER CODES” at the end of this manual.

The following table shows the factory preset component

(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code

for each area.

You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even

if a YAMAHA manufacturer code is initially set as listed above.

In this case, try to set other YAMAHA manufacturer code(s).

1Press an input selector button or / to

select the component you want to set up.

2Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

3Press the numeric buttons to enter the four

digit manufacturer’s code for the component

to be used.

Refer to “LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES” at

the end of this manual.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,

try each of them until you find the correct one.

If you wait for more than 30 seconds during step 3, the setup

process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2.

Setting manufacturer codes

Input

area

Component

category

(Library)

Manufacturer Code

CD CD YAMAHA 0005

MD/CD-R MD YAMAHA 0024

TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 0003

DVD DVD YAMAHA 0098

DTV/CBL –

V-AUX –

VCR –

––

––

Note

Notes

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 52 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

53

English

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Once you set the appropriate manufacturer codes, you can

use this remote to control your other components. Note

that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected

component. Use the input selector buttons to select the

component you want to operate. The remote control

automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for

that component.

*1 This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.

*2 These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in DTV/CBL or .

When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in both the DTV/CBL and areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/

CBL area.

*3 These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR if the manufacturer code is set in VCR.

Controlling other components

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

MUTE

VOLUME

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

FREQ/RDS EONSTART

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

MODE PTY SEEK

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

SELECT

PRESET/CH

4

3

2

5

6

7

8

9

B

D

0

1

A

C

DVD player/

DVD recorder VCR Digital TV/

Cable TV CD player MD/CD recorder Tuner

1AV P OW E R Power *1 Power *1 VCR power *3 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1

2TV POWER TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2

3TV CH + TV channel up *2 TV channel up *2 TV channel up TV channel up *2 TV channel up *2 TV channel up *2

TV CH – TV channel down *2 TV channel down *2 TV channel down TV channel down *2 TV channel down *2 TV channel down *2

4TV VOL + TV volume up *2 TV volume up *2 TV volume up TV volume up *2 TV volume up *2 TV volume up *2

TV VOL – TV volume down *2 TV volume down *2 TV volume down TV volume down *2 TV volume down *2 TV volume down *2

5TV MUTE TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2

6TV INPUT TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2

71-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8)

8TITLE Title

9PRESET/CH uUp VCR channel up Preset up

PRESET/CH dDown VCR channel down Preset down

PRESET/CH jRight

PRESET/CH iLeft

0RETURN Return

AREC/DISC

SKIP

Disc skip (player)

Rec (recorder) Rec VCR rec *3 Rec (MD)

pPlay Play VCR play *3 Play Play

wSearch backward Search backward VCR search

backward *3 Search backward Search backward

fSearch forward Search forward VCR search forward *3 Search forward Search forward

AUDIO Audio

ePause Pause VCR pause *3 Pause Pause

bSkip backward Skip backward Skip backward

aSkip forward Skip forward Skip forward

sStop Stop VCR stop *3 Stop Stop

BENTER Title/Index Enter Enter Index Index

CMENU Menu A/B/C/D/E

DDISPLAY Display Display Display Display

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 53 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

54

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Clearing a setup manufacturer code for

component control

1Press an input selector button or / to

select the component control for which you

want to clear the manufacturer code.

2Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

3If you do not press any button within 30

seconds after step 2, the clearing process is

canceled. If this happens, start over from

step 1.

4Enter the code number “0000”.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice, and the manufacturer code for the

selected component is cleared.

y

You can clear all setup manufacturer codes at once by entering the

code number “9990”.

Clearing setup manufacturer codes

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 54 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

55

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument

are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In

addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections

enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size

and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

Elements of a sound field

In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming

straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are

two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to

make up the sound field:

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms

– 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one

surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall.

Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen

the clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberation taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a

concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at

all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly

what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field

processor.

You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset

parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial

settings, you can change some of the parameters to better

suit the input source or your listening room.

1Press AMP.

2Select the sound field program you want to

adjust.

3Press u / d to select

the parameters.

4Press j / i to change

the parameter value.

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

What is a sound field Changing parameter settings

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHT

q/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

SELECT

PRESET/CH

3,4

1

2

AMP

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHT

q/DTS

EFFECT

SELECT

PRESET/CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 55 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

56

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

5Repeat steps 2 through 4 as necessary to

change other program parameters.

You cannot change parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD”

is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set

“MEMORY GUARD” to OFF (see page 49).

Resetting parameters to the factory

presets

To reset a certain parameter

Select the parameter you want to reset, then press j / i

repeatedly to select the factory preset (the display pauses

momentarily at the factory preset before proceeding to the

next value).

To reset all parameters

Use PARAM. INI (see page 50).

Note

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the parameter values will return to the

factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter

value again.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 56 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

57

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

DSP LEVEL

Function: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.

Description: Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP

effect level relative to the level of the direct sound.

Control range: –6 dB – +3 dB

DELAY (Delay)

Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the

direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.

Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther

it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value.

Control range: 1 99 msec

For 6ch Stereo

Function: These parameter adjusts the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.

Control Range: 0 – 100%

CT LEVEL (Center level)

SL LEVEL (Surround left level)

SR LEVEL (Surround right level)

SB LEVEL (Surround back level)

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

Source Sound

Early

Reflections

Time Time Time

DELAY DELAY DELAY

Sound Source

Reflection Face

Level

Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms

Level

Level

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 57 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

58

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

For PRO LOGIC IIx Music and PRO LOGIC II Music

PANORAMA

Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF.

DIMENSION

Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard).

CT WIDTH (Center width)

Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the

center image towards the front left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only

from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3.

For PRO LOGIC IIx Movie, Music and Game

PLII/PLIIx (Pro Logic II/Pro Logic IIx)

Function: Switches the type of Pro Logic decoding to be used. PLII decoding creates 5.1-channel sound from

2-channel sources. PLIIx decoding creates 6.1-channel sound from 2-channel sources.

Choices: PLII, PLIIx

For DTS Neo:6 Music

C. IMAGE (Center image)

Function: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.

Control range: 0 – 0.5

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 58 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

TROUBLESHOOTING

59

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the

nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

General

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy Refer to

page

This unit fails to turn

on when STANDBY/

ON (or SYSTEM

POWER) is pressed,

or enters in the

standby mode soon

after the power has

been turned on.

The power cord is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cord firmly.

The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers. 20

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit

and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for

each connection does not touch anything other than

its respective connection.

11-12

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

and strong static electricity).

Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the

power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use

it normally.

No sound Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

14-17

The input mode is set to DTS or

ANALOG.

Select AUTO. 31

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with INPUT,

MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons.

25

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 11

The front speakers to be used have not

been selected properly.

Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or

B.

25

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to

cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

26

The input mode is set to ANALOG while

playing a source encoded with a DTS

signal.

Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. 31

The signals this unit cannot reproduce are

being received from a source component

e.g.: a CD-ROM.

Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.

No picture The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video

jacks.

Turn on the video conversion function (HTR-5750

only).

49

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 59 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

60

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy Refer to

page

The sound suddenly

goes off.

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the impedance selector setting is correct. 20

Check that the speaker wires are not touching each

other and then turn this unit back on.

The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again.

The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute. 26

Only the speaker on

one side can be

heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

11

Incorrect balance settings in SET MENU. Adjust the SP LEVEL settings. 47

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When playing a monaural source with a

CINEMA DSP program, the source signal

is directed to the center channel, and the

front and surround speakers output effect

sounds.

No sound from the

effect speakers.

The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn them on. 31

You are using a source or program

combination that does not output sound

from all channels.

Try another sound field program. 27, 39

No sound from the

center speaker.

The output level of the center speaker is

set to minimum.

Raise the level of the center speaker. 47

“CENTER” in SET MENU is set to

NONE.

Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker. 46

One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (except

for 6ch Stereo) has been selected.

Try another sound field program. 27, 39

No sound from the

surround speakers.

The output level of the surround speakers

is set to minimum.

Raise the output level of the surround speakers. 47

“SURR LR” in SET MENU is set to

NONE.

Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and

right speakers.

46

A monaural source is being played with

STRAIGHT.

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn on the sound

fields.

No sound from the

surround back

speaker.

“SURR LR” in SET MENU is set to

NONE.

If the surround left and right speakers are set to

NONE, the surround back speaker setting is

automatically set to NONE. Select the appropriate

setting for the surround speakers.

46

“SURR B” in SET MENU is set to

NONE.

Select LRG or SML. 46

No sound from the

subwoofer.

“BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set to

FRONT when a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal is being played.

Select SWFR or BOTH. 46

“BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set to

SWFR or FRNT when a 2-channel source

is being played.

Select BOTH. 46

The source does not contain low bass

signals.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 60 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

61

English

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

Problem Cause Remedy Refer to

page

Dolby Digital or DTS

sources cannot be

played. (Dolby Digital

or DTS indicator in

the front panel

display does not light

up.)

The connected component is not set to

output Dolby Digital or DTS digital

signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the operations

instructions for your component.

The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. 31

A “humming” sound

can be heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

The volume level

cannot be increased,

or the sound is

distorted.

The component connected to the OUT

(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.

Turn on the power to the component.

The sound effect

cannot be recorded.

It is not possible to record the sound effect

with a recording component.

[ HTR-5750 ]

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to this

DIGITAL OUTPUT

jack.

The source component is not connected to

this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks.

13-17, 38

Some components cannot record the

Dolby Digital or DTS sources.

A source cannot be

recorded by an

analog component

connected to the

AUDIO OUT jacks.

The source component is not connected to

this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks.

Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO

IN jacks.

13-17, 38

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings on this

unit cannot be

changed.

“MEMORY GUARD” in SET MENU is

set to ON.

Select OFF. 49

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and

then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears in the front

panel display.

Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 11

There is noise

interference from

digital or high-

frequency equipment,

or this unit.

This unit is too close to the digital or high

frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment.

The picture is

disturbed.

The video source uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent dubbing.

This unit suddenly

turns into the standby

mode.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then

turn it back on.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 61 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

62

TROUBLESHOOTING

Tuner

Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy Refer

to page

FM

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

18

Use the manual tuning method. 34

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multipath interference.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 18

Use the manual tuning method. 34

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned in.

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

Preset the stations again. 34

AM

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and orient it for best reception.

Use the manual tuning method. 34

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Noises result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

There are buzzing and

whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV.

Problem Cause Remedy Refer to

page

The remote control

does not work nor

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-

axis from the front panel.

7

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Reposition this unit.

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3

The manufacturer code was not correctly

set.

Set the manufacturer code correctly using the “LIST

OF MANUFACTURER CODES” at the end of this

manual.

52

Try to set another code for the same manufacturer

using the “LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES” at

the end of this manual.

52

Even if the manufacturer code is correctly

set, there are some models that do not

respond to the remote control.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 62 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS

63

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

If you want to reset all of your unit’s parameters for any

reason, do the following. This procedure completely resets

ALL parameters, including the SET MENU, level, assign

and tuner presets.

Be sure this unit is in standby mode.

1Hold down STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front

panel and press STANDBY/ON.

“FACTORY PRESET” appears in the front panel

display.

y

To cancel the initialization procedure without making any

changes, press STANDBY/ON.

2Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select the

desired setting.

Reset To reset the unit to its factory presets.

Cancel To cancel without making any changes.

3Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your

selection.

If you selected “Reset”, the unit is reset to its factory

presets and switches to standby mode.

If you selected “Cancel”, the unit switches to standby

mode and nothing is reset.

RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

STANDBY/ON STRAIGHT (EFFECT)

(U.S.A. model)

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 63 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

GLOSSARY

64

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3

front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround

stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio

channels. With an additional channel especially for bass

effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has

a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By

using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more

accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The

wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum

volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the

precise sound orientation generated using digital sound

processing provide listeners with previously unheard of

excitement and realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up

to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for

your enjoyment.

Dolby Digital Surround EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output

channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a

matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the

2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby

Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks

recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and

realistic moving sound especially with scenes with

“flyover” and “fly-around” effects.

Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software.

This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel

playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center

channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of

only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology). Music and Game modes are also available for

2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete

multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel

sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode

for movies (for 2-channel sources only) and a Game mode

for games.

Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog

(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality

for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully

backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers

to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz

sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/

24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24

master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-

motion video for music programs and motion picture

soundtracks on DVD-video.

DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy

the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of

DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces

practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a

left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus

an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-

channels). The unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that

enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding the surround

back channel to existing 5.1-channel format.

Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6

channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables

playback with the full-range channels with higher

separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two

modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music

sources and “Cinema mode” for movies.

GLOSSARY

Audio formats

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 64 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

65

English

GLOSSARY

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed

for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room

size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in

the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually

measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses

YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine

Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to

provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater

in the listening room of your own home.

SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound

field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP

algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field

surround effects even without any surround speakers by

using virtual surround speakers.

It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a

minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center

speaker.

ITU-R

ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU

(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R

recommends a standard speaker placement which is used

in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering

purposes.

LFE 0.1 channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code

modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits.

The range of rates that can be played back is determined

based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by

the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the

sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies

that can be played back, and the higher the number of

quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be

reproduced.

Sound field programs Audio information

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 65 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

66

GLOSSARY

Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB

and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be

reproduced more faithfully with this system because each

of these signals is independent. The component signal is

also called the “color difference signal” because the

luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.

A monitor with component input jacks is required in order

to use the component signal for output.

Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal

is composed of three basic elements of a video picture;

color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite

video jack on a video component transmits these three

elements combined.

S-Video signal

With the S-Video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S-Video cable. Using the S

VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and

allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

Video signal information

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 66 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

SPECIFICATIONS

67

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

AUDIO SECTION

Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω (HTR-5750) ..…………… 90 W

(HTR-5740) …………….. 85 W

Maximum Power (EIAJ)

[China and Korea models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 (HTR-5750) ………….…………………. 130 W

(HTR-5740) …………….……………… 125 W

Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 (HTR-5750) ………..…………………... 120/155/190/235 W

(HTR-5740) ………..…………………... 115/150/185/230 W

DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 (HTR-5740 only) ……………..……… 130 W

IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 (HTR-5740 only) ..…………………... 95 W

Damping Factor (IHF)

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ………………………….………………. 100 or more

Frequency Response

CD terminal to Front L/R ……….………… 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB

Total Harmonic Distortion

CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 40 W, 8 Ω) ……… 0.06%

Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ………………………….100 dB

Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R ……………………..…………………..………….. 150 µV or less

Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

CD (5.1 k terminated) to Front L/R ………………….. 60 dB/45 dB

Tone Control (Front L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ………..………………….……………….. ±10 dB/60 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ……….…………………..…………. ±10 dB/20 kHz

Phones Output ………………………………….……………… 150 mV/100

Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

CD, etc. ………………..…………………..…………………. 200 mV/47 k

MULTI CH INPUT …………….…………………..…….. 200 mV/47 k

Output Level/Output Impedance

REC OUT ……………………………..…………………..… 200 mV/1.2 k

SUB WOOFER ……………..…………………..……………….. 4 V/1.2 k

VIDEO SECTION

Video Signal Type .……………………….…………………..…… PAL/NTSC

Signal to Noise Ratio ……………….…………………..……………….. 50 dB

Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Composite ………………..………………………. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

Component …..…………………..………………. 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB

S-Video (HTR-5750 only) ……………….….. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] …..…………………. 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Other models] ……………………..……………… 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

Usable Sensitivity (IHF)…………………………………. 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ……………………………..…………………..…. 76 dB/70 dB

Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ……………………………..…………………..…… 0.2%/0.3%

Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ……………………………..……………….. 42 dB

Frequency Response …………………….. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB

AM SECTION

Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] …..………………….... 530 to 1710 kHz

[Other models] ……………………..……………………. 531 to 1611 kHz

Usable Sensitivity ……………………………..………………….…. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] …..………………….... AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ……………………………………….. AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[China model] …..…………………..………………….... AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] ……………………………….…………… AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] …………………………... AC 230 V, 50 Hz

Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] …..…………………..….. 350 W/440 VA

[Other models] ……………………..…………………..……………… 360 W

Standby Power Consumption …………………..………………….. 0.1 W

•AC Outlets

[U.K. and Australia models] ………….. 1 (Total 100 W maximum)

[Other models] ……………………..……… 2 (Total 100 W maximum)

Dimension (W x H x D) …………………..……… 435 x 161 x 416 mm

(17-1/8” x 6-3/8” x 16-3/8”)

Weight ………………………..…………………..………… 11 kg (24 lbs 4 oz)

SPECIFICATIONS

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 67 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

i

LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES

TV

A TANDY 0941

ABEX 1151

ADMIRA 1141

ADVENTURA 1131

AIKO 1121

AIWA 1481

AKAI 0331, 1101, 1111

ALBA 0431

ALLERON 1091

AMBASSADOR 1081

AMSTRAD 0481, 1081

ANAM 0251, 1041, 1051,

1061, 1071

ANAM NATIONAL 1041

AOC 0361, 1021, 1031,

1111, 1161

ARCHER 1161

AUDIOSONIC 1001

AUDIOVOX 1051, 1161

BAUER 0441

BAUR 1001

BEIJING 1511, 1551, 1561

BELCOR 1031

BELL & HOWELL 0981, 0991

BEON 1001

BRADFORD 1051

BROCKWOOD 1031

BROKSONIC 1161

BUSH 1001

CANDLE 0351, 0361, 0961,

0971, 1111, 1131

CAPEHART 1021

CARVER 0101

CATHAY 1001

CELEBRITY 0951

CENTURION 0411

CHANGHONG 1541, 1551, 1561,

1621

CITIZEN 0351, 0361, 0921,

0931, 0941, 0961,

0971, 1111, 1121,

1131

CLAIRTONE 1011

CLARIVOX 1001

CONCERTO 0351, 0971

CONROWA 1751

CONTEC 0901, 0911, 1011,

1051

CORANDO 0941

CRAIG 0251, 1051

CROWN 0941, 1051

CURTIS MATHES 0161, 0361,

0931, 0941,

0981, 1111

CXC 1051

DAEWOO 0291, 0301, 0331,

0721, 0941, 1001,

1031, 1121, 1191,

1531, 1581, 1591,

1601

DANSAI 1001

DAYTRON 0941, 1031

DECCA 0271, 1001

DIXI 0331, 1001, 1071

DUMONT 0891, 1031

DYNATECH 0881

ELECTROBAND 0951, 1011

ELECTROHOME 0941

ELECTRON 0941

ELIN 1001

ELTA 0331

EMERSON 0001, 0021, 0061,

0071, 0081, 0091,

0111, 0811, 0821,

0831, 0841, 0851,

0861, 0871, 0901,

0921, 0941, 0981,

1011, 1031, 1051,

1081, 1091

ENVISION 0361, 1111

ERRES 1001

ETRON 0331

FERGUSON 1001

FINLUX 1001

FISHER 0171, 0801, 0981

FORMENTI 0441

FORMONTI 1001

FORTRESS 1141

FUJITSU 1091

FUNAI 1051, 1091, 1501,

1521

FUTURETECH 1051

GE 0131, 0161, 0201,

0751, 0761, 0771,

0781, 0791, 0811,

0861, 1041

GEC 0271, 1001

GEMINI 0391

GENEXXA 0431

GIBRALTER 0891, 1031, 1111

GOODMANS/TASHIKO

0271, 0661, 1001

GRANADA 1001

GRUNDIG 1781, 1791, 1801,

1811, 1821, 1831,

1841, 1851, 1861,

1871, 1881

GUNPY 1051, 1091

HARMAN/KARDON 0721

HALLMARK 0861

HANSEATIC 1001

HARVARD 1051, 1061

HINARI 1001, 1091

HITACHI 0181, 0351, 0671,

0681, 0691, 0701,

0711, 0871, 0941,

0971, 1351

HYPSON 1001

IMA 1051

INDIANA 1001

INFINITY REFERENCE

0101

INTERFUNK 1001

ITT 0611

JANEIL 1131

JBL 0101

JCB 0951

JENSEN 0311

JINXING 1531, 1541, 1551,

1561, 1571, 1621,

1631, 1641, 1651,

1691, 1731

JVC (VICTOR) 0261, 0281, 0641,

0651, 0661, 0841

KAWASHO 0901

KAYPANI 1021

KENWOOD 0361, 1031, 1111

KLOSS 0631, 0721, 1131

KTV 0921, 0941, 1011,

1051, 1111

LEYCO 1001

LG (GOLDSTAR) 0031, 0121,

0351, 0411, 0731,

0741, 0861, 0941,

0971, 1001, 1031,

1111, 1151

LIESENK & TTER 1001

LLOYTRON 0941

LOEWE 1001

LOGIK 0991, 1771

LUXMAN 0351, 0971

LXI 0101, 0621, 0761,

0861, 0981

MAGNAVOX 0101, 0341, 0391,

0401, 0411, 0421,

0581, 0591, 0601,

0611, 0631, 0661,

0961, 1111

MAJESTIC 0991

MARANTZ 0101, 0221, 0361,

1001, 1111

MARK 1001

MATSUI 0271, 0331, 1001

MEDIATOR 1001

MEGATRON 0691, 0861, 1161

MEI 1011

M-ELECTRONIC 1001

MEMOREX 0331, 0571, 0861,

0971, 0981, 0991,

1771

METZ 1791, 1831, 1891,

1901, 1911, 1921,

1931, 1941

MGA 0361, 0561, 0571,

0861, 1031, 1111

MIDLAND 0751, 0761, 0891,

0941, 1151

MITSUBISHI 0221, 0321, 0561,

0571, 0661, 0861,

1031, 1101, 1381

MONTGOMERY 1091

MOTOROLA 1041, 1141

MTC 0351, 0361, 0881,

0931, 0971, 1011,

1031, 1111

MULTITECH 0881, 1051

NAD 0551, 0621, 0861

NEC 0241, 0351, 0361,

0661, 0971, 1031,

1111, 1321, 1711

NECKERMANN 1001

NEI 1001

NIKKAI 0271, 0431, 1001,

1151

NIKKO 0861, 1111, 1121

NOVABEAM 0721

NTC 1121

ONWA 1051

OPTIMUS 0551

OPTONICA 0541, 1141

ORION 0831, 1001

OSAKI 0271, 1151

OTTO VERSAND 1001

PANASONIC 0101, 0191, 0251,

0751, 1041, 1311,

1371, 1431

PANDA 1541, 1721

PENNY 0161, 0361, 0521,

0531, 0621, 0731,

0751, 0761, 0781,

0791, 0861, 0931,

0941, 1031, 1041,

1111, 1151, 1161

PEONY 1561, 1621

PHILCO 0361, 0581, 0591,

0601, 0611, 0631,

0961, 1031, 1111

PHILIPS 0101, 0401, 1001

PHONOLA 1001

PILOT 0941, 1031, 1111

PIONEER 0511, 0551, 0871

PORTLAND 0941, 1031, 1121

PRICECLUB 0931

PRISM 0751

PROSCAN 0761

PROTECH 1001

PROTON 0501, 0861, 0941,

1021, 1161

PULSAR 0891

PULSER 1031

QUASAR 0251, 0751, 1041

QUELLE 1001

RADIO SHACK 0541, 0941,

1031, 1051,

1151

RADIOLA 1001

RCA 0051, 0141, 0151,

0181, 0411, 0491,

0531, 0761, 0771,

0871, 1031

REALISTIC 0541, 0861, 0941,

0971, 0981, 1031,

1051, 1111, 1151

RHAPSODY 1011

R-LINE 1001

RUNCO 0891, 1111

SAISHO 0331, 1081

SAMPO 0361, 0941, 1021,

1111, 1151

SAMSUNG 0331, 0341, 0351,

0361, 0861, 0931,

0941, 0971, 1001,

1031, 1111, 1151

SAMSUX 0941

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page i Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

ii

SANYO 0171, 0231, 0271,

0661, 0801, 0911,

0981, 1231, 1251,

1261

SBR 1001

SCHEIDER 1001

SCIMITSU 1031

SCOTCH 0861

SCOTT 0831, 0861, 0941,

1031, 1051, 1091

SEARS 0101, 0161, 0171,

0351, 0481, 0521,

0621, 0761, 0801,

0861, 0971, 0981,

1091

SHANGHAI 1561, 1681

SHARP 0461, 0471, 0541,

0661, 0911, 0941,

1141

SHOGUN 1031

SIGNATURE 0991, 1771

SIMPSON 0581, 0961

SOLAVOX 1151

SONOKO 1001

SONTEC 1001

SONY 0371, 0451, 0661,

0841, 0951, 1281,

1441

SOUNDESIGN 0861, 0961, 1051,

1091

SOUNDWAVE 1001

SPECTRICON 1161

SQUAREVIEW 0481

SSS 1031, 1051

STAR-LITE 1051

SUPREM 0951

SUPRE-MACY 1131

SURPA 0351, 0971

SYLVANIA 0101, 0361, 0441,

0581, 0591, 0601,

0611, 0631, 0961,

1111

SYMPHONIC 0481

SYSLINE 1001

TANDY 0271, 0431, 1141

TATUNG 0271, 0881, 1001,

1041, 1161

TCL 1561, 1631, 1701

TECHNICS 0751

TECHWOOD 0351, 0751, 0971

TEKNIKA 0101, 0351, 0571,

0931, 0941, 0961,

0971, 0991, 1031,

1051, 1091, 1121,

1131, 1771

TELETECH 0331

TERA 0501

THAKRAL 1671

THORM 1001

TMK 0351, 0861, 0971,

1081

TOSHIBA 0381, 0521, 0621,

0661, 0931, 0981,

1301

TOSONIC 1011

TOTEVISION 0941

TRICAL 0911

UNIVERSAL 0781, 0791

UNIVERSUM 1001

VECTOR RESEARCH

0361, 1111

VESTEL 1001

VIDEO CONCEPT 1101

VIDIKRON 0101, 0211

VIDTECH 0861, 1031

VIKING 1131

WARDS 0101, 0361, 0451,

0541, 0581, 0591,

0601, 0611, 0771,

0781, 0791, 0861,

0971, 0991, 1031,

1091, 1111, 1771

WATSON 1001

XOGEGO 1611, 1621, 1661,

1741, 1761

YAMAHA 0361, 1031, 1111

YOKO 1001

ZENITH 0011, 0041, 0891,

0991, 1771

ZONDA 1161

CABLE TV

ABC 0256, 0376

ANTRONIX 0136

ARCHER 0136, 0286

BBT 0076

CABLETIME 0166

CABLEVISION 0196

COLOUR VOICE 0306, 0346

COMTRONICS 0216, 0276

EAGLE COMTRONICS

0276

EASTERN 0066

ELECTRICORD 0206

ELECTUS 0266

GE 0116, 0126

GEC CABLE SYSTEM

0196

HAMLIN H5 0676

HAMLIN H6 0666

HAMLIN H6S 0656

HAMLIN H8 0646

HAMLIN H9 0636

JERROLD 0256

JERROLD 400L 0626

JERROLD 450L 0616

JERROLD 550 0606

JERROLD OSD CATV

0596

JERROLD SPRUCER

0436

MAGNAVOX/PHILIPS

0416, 0426

MAMM 0296

MEMOREX 0386

MOVIE TIME 0146, 0206

NORTHCOAST 0016

NSC 0146

OAK 0106

OAK SIGMA 450 0546

OAK SIGMA 550 0536

PANASONIC TZ 120/130

0476

PANASONIC TZ 170/180

0446

PANASONIC TZ140 0466

PANASONIC TZ150/160

0456

PARAGON 0386

PHILIPS 0036, 0216, 0306,

0316, 0326, 0336,

0346

PIONEER 0006, 0086

PIONEER BR50 0846

PIONEER BR60/70/80/81/82

0696

PIONEER BR90 0556

PULSAR 0386

RCA DIGITAL SATELLITE

SYSTEM 0396, 0406

REALISTIC 0136

REGENCY/EASTERN0686

RUNCO 0386

SAMSUNG 0276

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 175/475

0576

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 75

0366, 0586

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 8650

0566

SIGNAL 0276

SL MARX 0276

SPECTAVISION 0236

STANDARD COMPONENTS

0186

STARCOM V 0256

STARGATE 0276

SYLVANIA/TEXSCAN

0376, 0496

TEKNIKA 0176

TELESERVICE 0056

TELEVIEW 0276

TEXSCAN 0186, 0376

TFC 0026

TOCOM 0226, 0356

TOCOM 5503A 0526

TOCOM 5503VIP/5507

0516

TOCOM TC56 0506

TOSHIBA 0386

TUDI 0046

UNIKA 0136

UNIVERSAL 0136, 0156, 0206,

0286

VIDEOWAY 0096

VIEWSTAR 0216

ZENITH 0246, 0386, 0486

SATELLITE TUNER

ALPHA STAR 0826

CHAPARRAL 0756

ECHOSTAR 0836

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0776, 0876

HTS 0836

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

0816

JERROLD 0776, 0786

PANASONIC 0806

PRIMESTAR 0776, 0786

RCA 0766

SONY 0796

(DBS)

HITACHI 0856

MAGNAVOX 0886

MEMOREX 0886

PANASONIC 0896

PHILIPS 0886

SONY 0906

STAR CHOICE 0876

TOSHIBA 0866, 0916

UNIDEN 0886

VCR

A TANDY 0902

ADVENTURA 0992

AIKO 0982

AIWA 0992

AKAI 0262, 0942, 0952,

0962, 0972

AMERICAN HIGH 0932

AMSTRAD 0992

ASA 0002, 0912

ASHA 0922

AUDIO DYNAMICS 0202

AUDIOVOX 0912

BEAUMARK 0922

BELL & HOWELL 0902

BLAUPUNKT 0412

BROKSONIC 0872, 0882, 0892

BUSH 0852

CALIX 0912

CANON 0862, 0932

CCE 0852, 0982

CITIZEN 0912, 0982

COLT 0852

CRAIG 0832, 0842, 0852,

0912, 0922

CURTIS MATHES 0662, 0822,

0932

CYBERNEX 0922

DAEWOO 0802, 0812, 0982

DBX 0202

DYNATECH 0472, 0992

ELECTROHOME 0912

ELECTROPHONIC 0912

EMEREX 0792

EMERSON 0072, 0132, 0142,

0152, 0162, 0172,

0182, 0192, 0212,

0702, 0712, 0722,

0732, 0742, 0752,

0762, 0772, 0782,

0872, 0882, 0892,

0912, 0952, 0992,

1072

FINLUX 0002, 0992

FISHER 0682, 0692, 0842,

0902

FUJI 0672, 0932

FUNAI 0992

GARRARD 0992

GE 0662, 0822, 0932

GO VIDEO 0642, 0652

GOODMANS 0402

GRADIENTE 0992

GRANDA 0612, 0902

GRUNDIG 0002

HARLEY DAVIDSON

0992

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page ii Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

iii

HARMAN/KARDON

0632, 1082

HARWOOD 0752, 0852

HEADQUARTER 0612

HI-Q 0842

HINARI 0852

HITACHI 0102, 0562, 0572,

0582, 0592, 0602,

0992

ITT 0942

JVC (VICTOR) 0202, 0522, 0532,

0542, 0552

KENWOOD 0202, 0542, 0612,

0632, 0902

KLH 0852

KODAK 0912, 0932

LG (GOLDSTAR) 0082, 0632,

0912

LLOYD 0992

LOGIK 0852

LUXOR 0942

LXI 0022, 0912

MAGNAVOX 0002, 0482, 0492,

0502, 0512, 0932

MAGNIN 0922

MARANTZ 0002, 0202, 0402,

0632, 0932

MARTA 0912

MATSUSHITA 0932

MATSUI 0722

MEI 0222, 0932

MEMOREX 0232, 0242, 0472,

0512, 0612, 0842,

0902, 0912, 0922,

0932, 0992

MGA 0762, 0952

MGA TECHNOLOGY

0922

MINOLTA 0592, 0602

MITSUBISHI 0452, 0462, 0542,

0762, 0952, 1082

MOTOROLA 0472, 0932

MTC 0922, 0992

MULTITECH 0852, 0992

NAD 0442

NEC 0122, 0202, 0292,

0422, 0432, 0542,

0632

NIKKO 0912

NOBLEX 0922

OLYMPUS 0412, 0932

OPTIMUS 0442, 0472, 0912

OPTONICA 0402

ORION 0212, 0722, 0742,

0772

OSAKI 0912

PANASONIC 0012, 0052, 0092,

0222, 0372, 0382,

0392, 0412, 0932

PENNY 0202, 0432, 0602,

0632, 0692, 0912,

0922, 0932

PENTAX 0592, 0602

PERDIO 0992

PHILCO 0002, 0932

PHILIPS 0002, 0282, 0402,

0492, 0932

PILOT 0912

PIONEER 0442, 0542

PROSCAN 1002, 1012, 1022,

1032, 1042, 1052,

1062

PULSAR 0512

QUARTER 0612

QUARTZ 0272, 0612

QUASAR 0382, 0392, 0932

RADIO SHACK 0912, 0992

RADIX 0912

RANDEX 0912

RCA 0112, 0382, 0392,

0482, 0592, 0602,

0662, 0822, 0942

REALISTIC 0402, 0472, 0612,

0682, 0842, 0902,

0912, 0922, 0932,

0992

RICOH 0352, 0362

SAISHO 0212, 0582, 0722,

0732, 0742, 0772

SALORA 0612, 0762

SAMSUNG 0212, 0312, 0922,

0962

SANKY 0472, 0512

SANSUI 0292, 0542, 0832

SANYO 0242, 0612, 0842,

0902, 0922

SBR 0002, 0282

SCHEIDER 0852

SCOTT 0342, 0712, 0762,

0872, 0882, 0892

SEARS 0302, 0592, 0602,

0612, 0682, 0692,

0842, 0902, 0912,

0932

SHARP 0402, 0472

SHINTOM 0852

SHOGUN 0922

SINGER 0852

SONY 0032, 0332, 0352,

0362, 0672, 0792,

0932

STS 0602

SUNPAK 0352

SYLVANIA 0002, 0492, 0502,

0762, 0932, 0992

SYMPHONIC 0992

TANDY 0992

TASHIKO 0712, 0992

TEAC 0992

TECHNICS 0932

TEKNIKA 0322, 0912, 0932,

0992

TELEFUNKEN 0252

TMK 0212, 0732, 0772,

0922

TOSHIBA 0062, 0302, 0342,

0622, 0682, 0712,

0762

TOTEVISION 0912, 0922

UNITECH 0922

VECTOR RESEARCH

0202, 0432, 0632

VIDEO CONCEPTS

0202, 0432, 0632,

0952

WARDS 0322, 0402, 0472,

0482, 0602, 0712,

0842, 0852, 0922,

0932, 0992

YAMAHA 0202, 0632

ZENITH 0042, 0362, 0512,

0672

DVD PLAYER

AKAI 0058

AIWA 0218

DENON 0188

HITACHI 0198

JVC (VICTOR) 0088, 0178

KENWOOD 0148

LG (GOLDSTAR) 0228

MAGNAVOX 0128

MITSUBISHI 0138

ONKYO 0068, 0128

PANASONIC 0028

PHILIPS 0098, 0128

PIONEER 0108, 0118

PROSCAN 0158

RCA 0158

SAMSUNG 0078

SHARP 0038

SONY 0018

TECHNICS 0028

THOMSON 0168

TOSHIBA 0048, 0128

YAMAHA 0008, 0028, 0098

ZENITH 0128

DVD RECORDER

PANASONIC 0238, 0248, 0258

PHILIPS 0208

PIONEER 0278, 0288, 0298

TOSHIBA 0268

YAMAHA 0208

LD PLAYER

AIWA 0157

DENON 0147

DISCO VISION0017

FUNAI 0157

HITACHI (E) 0017

KENWOOD 0087, 0107

MAGNAVOX 0027

MARANTZ 0027

MITSUBISHI 0137

NAD 0137

PANASONIC 0077, 0177

PHILIPS 0027

PIONEER 0017, 0037, 0137

RCA 0167

REALISTIC 0157

SHARP 0127

SONY 0047, 0057, 0117

VICTOR 0097

YAMAHA 0007, 0067

CD PLAYER

ACOUSTIC RESEARCH

1295

ADC 0025, 0065

ADCOM 0205, 0255, 1015

ADS 0265

AIWA 0295, 0945, 1035,

1055

AKAI 0175, 0485, 0535

ALPINE 1215, 1305

AUDIO-TECHNICA 0545

BSR 0245, 0655, 0775

CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB

0055

CAPETRONIC 1205

CARRERA 0245

CARVER 0285, 1135

CASIO 0345

CROWN 0185

CURTIS MATHES 0345

DENON 0275, 0875, 0885

DEUAL (E) 0505

DYNAMIC BASS (H)

0555

EMERSON 0205, 0325, 1105

EROICA 1275

FISHER 0095, 0555, 0925,

1005

GARRARD 0365

GENEXXA 0305, 0325, 1105

HARMAN/KARDON 0105, 0175,

0465, 0995

HITACHI 0195, 0205, 0505,

0815

INKEL 0115, 0395

JVC (VICTOR) 0315

KENWOOD 0045, 0095, 0405,

0585, 0725, 0735,

0745, 0755, 0895

KYOCERA 0025

LG (GOLDSTAR) 1135, 1225,

1265, 1335

LUXMAN 0075, 0425, 0675,

0705, 0715, 0985

MAGNAVOX 0165, 0215, 0645,

0955

MARANTZ 0215, 0235, 0375,

0785, 1345

MCINTOSH 0355, 1085

MCS 0905, 1315

MEMOREX 0205, 0225, 0235,

0305, 0325, 1105

MGA 0135

MISSION 0215

MITSUBISHI 0135, 0445

MTC 1255

NAD 0035, 0615, 0685,

0695

NAKAMICHI 0125, 0435, 0515

NEC 0255, 0905, 0965

NIKKO 0545, 1005

ONKYO 0155, 0455, 0495,

0805, 1155

OPTIMUS 0225, 0245, 0555,

0595, 0845, 0855,

0865, 0895, 0935

PANASONIC 0055, 0825, 1095,

1125

PENNY 0905

PHILIPS 0165, 0215

PIONEER 0305, 0935, 1045

PROTON 0215, 1185

QUASAR 0055

RCA 0205, 0915, 1115

REALISTIC 0205, 0225, 0235,

0325, 0555, 0845

REVOX 1175

ROTEL 0215

SABA TELECOMMANDER (E)

0505

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page iii Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

iv

SAE 0215

SAMSUNG 1285

SANSUI 0215, 0625, 0975,

1025, 1105

SANYO 0145, 0555, 0635,

0765

SCOTT 0325, 1105

SEARS 0345

SHARP 0235, 0665, 0895,

1065, 1075

SHERWOOD 0115, 0235, 0395,

0475

SIEMENTS GARRARD

1245

SIGNATURE 0175

SONTEC 1165

SONY 0065, 0565, 0865,

1145

STARON 1235

STS 0025

SYLVANIA 0215

SYMPHONIC 0335

TANDY 0305

TANGBERG 1195

TEAC 0235, 0335, 0385,

0525, 0795, 0835,

1355

TECHNICS 0055, 0605, 1095

TECHWOOD 1325

TELEFUNKEN (E) 0505

THOMSON (E) 0505

TOSHIBA 0035, 0685

VECTOR RESEARCH

0065, 1135

WARDS 0175

YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 0085,

0415, 0545, 0575,

1065

CD RECORDER

HITACHI 0474

JVC (VICTOR) 0504

MARANTZ 0484, 0494

PHILIPS 0444

PIONEER 0454

YAMAHA 0414

MD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0384

PIONEER 0424

SHARP 0434

SONY 0394

YAMAHA 0024, 0394, 0404,

0514

TAPE DECK

AIWA 0094, 0214, 0224

AKAI 0184

CARVER 0094

DENON 0304

FISHER 0144

GARRARD 0194, 0204

JVC (VICTOR) 0274, 0284, 0294

KENWOOD 0124, 0134, 0154,

0234, 0244, 0264

MAGNAVOX 0094

MARANTZ 0094, 0344

MITSUBISHI 0184

OPTIMUS 0034, 0064, 0204,

0334

ONKYO 0364, 0374

PHILIPS 0094

PIONEER 0034, 0044, 0064

REVOX 0354

SANSUI 0094, 0344

SHARP 0264

SHERWOOD 0334

SONY 0054, 0084, 0324

TEAC 0194, 0254

TECHNICS 0074, 0314

WAR DS 0 03 4

YAMAHA 0004, 0014, 0104,

0114, 0164, 0174,

0264

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page iv Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

2004 All rights reserved.

Printed in Malaysia WC85350

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

HTR-5750/HTR-5740

AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL

U

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

i

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use

a damp cloth for cleaning.

6Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by

the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9A product and cart combination should be moved with care.

Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven

surfaces may cause the product and cart

combination to overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack

unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s

instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the

product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page i Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

ii

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-

mance — this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,

be sure the service technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the same

characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized

substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other

hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to

this product, ask the service technician to perform safety

checks to determine that the product is in proper operating

condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna

or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,

provides information with regard to proper grounding of the

mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire

to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s

attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides

guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies

that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding

system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as

practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to

follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15

for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found

in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page ii Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

iii

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this

manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future

reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool,

dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat

sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.

Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top,

20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of

this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical

appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid

humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature

changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit

in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with

a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this

unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may

fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to

liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit,

do not place:

Other components, as they may cause damage

and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.

Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall

and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user

and/or damage to this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,

curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If

the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may

overheat, possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall

outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this

might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.

Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified

is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this

unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be

held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the

power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical

storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact

qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any

service is needed. The cabinet should never be

opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods

of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug

from the wall outlet.

16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

on common operating errors before concluding that

this unit is faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set

this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the

AC power plug from the wall outlet.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound

come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion — and, most importantly, without affecting your

sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YA MAHA and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid

prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as

long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself

is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this

state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of

power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page iii Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

1

English

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

FEATURES………..………………………………………….. 2

GETTING STARTED…………………………..………… 3

Supplied accessories .……………….…………….………….. 3

Installing batteries in the remote control ……..……….. 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS .………………..…. 4

Front panel …….………………………….…………….……….. 4

Remote control.………………………….……………….…….. 6

Using the remote control ……………….…………….…….. 7

Front panel display …………………….…………….……….. 8

Rear panel ……..………………………….…………….……….. 9

SPEAKER SETUP ……………………………………….. 10

Speaker placement .…………….…………….……………… 10

Speaker connections …………………..…………….……… 11

CONNECTIONS ….………………………………………. 13

Before connecting components.……………….………… 13

Connecting video components……..……………….…… 14

Connecting audio components………..…………….…… 17

Connecting the antennas…………..…………….………… 18

Connecting the power supply cord ………..…………… 19

Turning on the power……….………………………….…… 21

BASIC SETUP.…………..………….…………………….. 22

Using the BASIC SETUP menu………………………… 22

PLAYBACK…….…………………………………………… 25

Basic operations……………………………….…………… 25

Selecting sound field programs ………………………. 27

Selecting input modes…..…………….……………….…… 31

TUNING ….……………………..……………………………. 33

Automatic and manual tuning…………………….……… 33

Presetting stations …………………………………………. 34

Selecting preset stations..……………….…………….…… 36

Exchanging preset stations ……….……………….……… 37

RECORDING ……………………..……………………….. 38

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

DESCRIPTIONS.…………………………………..…..39

For movie/video sources……………….…………….……. 39

For music sources …….……………….…………….………. 41

ADVANCED OPERATIONS …………….…………..42

Using the sleep timer ……..……………….…………….…. 42

Manually adjusting speaker levels….…………….……. 43

Using the test tone ………………………….…………….…. 43

SET MENU …….……………………………………………..44

Using SET MENU…………….………………………….. 45

1 SOUND MENU………………..………………………….. 46

2 INPUT MENU………………………….…………….…. 48

3 OPTION MENU…………………….…………….………. 49

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ……………....51

Control area ………….…………….………………………….. 51

Setting manufacturer codes………………………….……. 52

Controlling other components .………………………….. 53

Clearing setup manufacturer codes……………….…. 54

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ……55

What is a sound field ..…………….……………….………. 55

Changing parameter settings …………………………….. 55

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER

DESCRIPTIONS.…………………………………..…..57

TROUBLESHOOTING …..…………………………….59

RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS ……..63

GLOSSARY…………………………………………………..64

Audio formats …….………………………….…………….…. 64

Sound field programs…..……………….…………….……. 65

Audio information ……………………….…………….……. 65

Video signal information…..……………….…………….. 66

SPECIFICATIONS…………….……………………..…..67

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

FEATURES

2

Built-in 6-channel power amplifier

Minimum RMS output power

[ HTR-5750 ]

(0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8)

Front: 90 W + 90 W

Center: 90 W

Surround: 90 W + 90 W

Surround back: 90 W

[ HTR-5740 ]

(0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8)

Front: 85 W + 85 W

Center: 85 W

Surround: 85 W + 85 W

Surround back: 85 W

Sound field features

Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of

sound fields

Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

DTS/DTS ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6,

DTS 96/24 decoder

Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic

IIx decoder

Virtual CINEMA DSP

SILENT CINEMA

Sophisticated AM/FM tuner

40-station random access preset tuning

Automatic preset tuning

Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)

Other features

192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

A SET MENU which provides you with items for

optimizing this unit for your audio/video system

6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input

Component video input/output capability

Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

Sleep timer

Cinema and music night listening modes

Remote control with preset manufacturer codes

[ HTR-5750 only ]

S-Video signal input/output capability

Video signal conversion (Composite video S-Video)

capability for monitor out

This document is the owner’s manual for both HTR-5750 and HTR-5740. Model names are given where the details of functions are

unique to each model. Illustrations for HTR-5750 are mainly used for explanations.

y indicates a tip for your operation.

Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button

names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.

This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In

case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of

Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

FEATURES

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 2 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

GETTING STARTED

3

English

INTRODUCTION

Please check that you received all of the following parts.

1Press the part and slide the battery

compartment cover off.

2Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03,

UM-4) according to the polarity markings

(+ and –) on the inside of the battery

compartment.

3Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

Notes on batteries

Change all of the batteries if you notice the condition like; the

operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator

does not flash or its light becomes dim.

Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

GETTING STARTED

Supplied accessories

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDI O

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

FREQ/RDS EONSTARTMODE PTY SEEK

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

SELECT

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

PRESET/CH

RAV251

WC55290 EU

Remote control

Batteries (4)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.S.A., Canada and

China models)

AM loop antenna 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna

adapter (U.K. model only)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.K., Europe, Australia

and Korea models)

Installing batteries in the remote

control

1

3

2

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 3 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

4

1STANDBY/ON

Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When you

turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4

to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound.

In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in

order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control.

2Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control.

3Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit.

4FM/AM

Switches the reception band between FM and AM.

5A/B/C/D/E (NEXT)

Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when

the unit is in tuner mode.

Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted when the unit is

not in tuner mode.

6PRESET/TUNING l / h (LEVEL –/+)

Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is

displayed next to the band indication in the front panel

display when the unit is in tuner mode. Selects the tuning

frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed.

Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using

A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) when the unit is not in tuner mode.

7MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for

more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.

8TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Switches between automatic tuning (AUTO indicator on)

and manual tuning (AUTO indicator off).

9VIDEO AUX jacks

Input audio and video signals from a portable external

source such as a game console. To reproduce source

signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source.

0VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the REC OUT level.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

21347 856 09

EON

MODE

START

(U.S.A. model)

Note

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 4 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

5

English

INTRODUCTION

APHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack

Outputs audio signals for private listening with

headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals

are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers.

All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down

to the left and right headphone channels.

BSPEAKERS A/B

Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A

and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the

corresponding button is pressed.

CPRESET/TUNING (EDIT)

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h

(LEVEL –/+) between selecting preset station numbers

and tuning.

DSTRAIGHT (EFFECT)

Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is

selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are

output directly from their respective speakers without

effect processing.

ECONTROL

Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left and

right speakers (see page 26).

FBASS/TREBLE –/+

Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left and

right speakers (in conjunction with CONTROL).

GPROGRAM l / h

Use to select sound field programs (see page 26).

HINPUT MODE

Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of

signals received when one component is connected to two

or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 31).

IINPUT selector

Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.

JMULTI CH INPUT

Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes

priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input

selector buttons on the remote control).

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 5 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

6

This section describes the function of each control on the

remote control used to control this unit. To operate other

components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on

page 51.

1Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2CODE SET

Use to set up manufacturer codes (see page 52).

3Input selector buttons

Select the input source and change the control area.

4Sound field program / numeric buttons (1 — 8)

Use to select sound field programs.

Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when the

unit is in tuner mode.

5NIGHT

Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 30).

6LEVEL

Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the

level.

7Cursor buttons u / d / j / i / SELECT

Use to select and adjust sound field program parameters or

SET MENU items.

Press u / d to select preset station numbers when the unit

is in tuner mode.

8TEST (RETURN)

Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.

Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the

SET MENU parameters.

9TRANSMIT indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.

0STANDBY

Sets this unit in the standby mode.

ASYSTEM POWER

Turns on the power of this unit.

BSLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

CMULTI CH IN

Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external

decoder (etc.).

DAMP

Selects the AMP mode. You must select the AMP mode to

control the main unit.

EVOLUME/+

Increases or decreases the volume level.

FMUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to

the previous volume level.

GEX/ES

Switches between 5.1 or 6.1-channel playback of multi-

channel software.

Remote control

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

DISC SKIP

FREQ/RDS

EON

START

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

MODE

PTY SEEK

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

SELECT

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

PRESET/CH

9

0

A

B

C

D

E

F

H

I

1

2

3

4

5

7

8

6

G

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 6 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

7

English

INTRODUCTION

HSTRAIGHT (EFFECT)

Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is

selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are

output directly from their respective speakers without

effect processing.

ISET MENU (A/B/C/D/E)

Activates the SET MENU function.

Selects preset station groups when the unit is in tuner

mode.

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on the main unit during operation.

Handling the remote control

Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote

control.

Do not drop the remote control.

Do not leave or store the remote control in the

following types of conditions:

high humidity such as near a bath

high temperature such as near a heater or stove

extremely low temperatures

dusty places

Using the remote control

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

30 30

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSICENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

SELECT

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

PRESET/CH

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 7 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

8

1Decoder indicators

When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective

indicator lights up.

2SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound

field program is selected (see page 26).

3NIGHT indicator

Lights up when you select night listening mode.

4Input source indicators

A cursor lights to show the current input source.

5Sound field indicators

Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields.

6CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field

program.

7AUTO indicator

Lights up to indicate that automatic tuning is possible.

8TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station.

9STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an

FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.

0MEMORY indicator

Blinks to show that a station can be stored.

AMUTE indicator

Blinks while the MUTE function is on.

BVOLUME level indication

Indicates the volume level.

CPCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code

modulation) digital audio signals.

DVIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see

page 31).

EHeadphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

FSP A B indicators

Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.

Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are

selected.

GSLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

HHiFi DSP

Lights when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program.

IMulti-information display

Shows the current sound field program name and other

information when adjusting or changing settings.

J96/24 indicator

Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

KLFE indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.

LInput channel indicators/speaker indicators

Indicate the channel components of the current digital

input signal.

Indicate the number of speakers connected in SPEAKERS

(page 23), or indicate the channel being adjusted in SP

LEVEL (page 47).

Front panel display

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

q

PL

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT PTY HOLD

AUTO

PS

RT CT

EON

PTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

123456 780AB9

FG H I K LJEDC

Presence DSP sound field

Listening position

Left surround

DSP sound field Right surround

DSP sound field

Surround back DSP sound field

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 8 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

9

English

INTRODUCTION

1DIGITAL INPUT jacks

[ HTR-5750 ]

CD5, DTV/CBL4, DVD3, MD/CD-R2

[ HTR-5740 ]

CD3, DTV/CBL2, DVD1

See pages 14, 16 and 17 for details.

2MULTI CH INPUT jacks

See page 15 for connection information.

3Video component jacks

See pages 14 and 16 for connection information.

S VIDEO jacks are only available for HTR-5750.

4AC OUTLET(S)

Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see

page 19).

5DIGITAL OUTPUT jack (HTR-5750 only)

See page 17 for details.

6Audio component jacks

See page 17 for connection information.

7SUB WOOFER OUTPUT jack

See page 12 for connection information.

8Antenna terminals

See page 18 for connection information.

9Speaker terminals

See page 12 for connection information.

0IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

See page 20.

Rear panel

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

MONITOR OUT

MULTI CH INPUT

OUTPUT

AUDIO

AUDIO

VIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

DTV

/CBL

VIDEO

RL

RL

IN

(PLAY)

OUT

(REC)

MD

/CD-R

CD

OUT

VCR

VIDEO

IN

FRONT

SURROUND

TUNER

AM

ANT

GND

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

R

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

DTV

/CBL

P

B

Y

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

OPTICAL

MD/CD-R

DVD

DTV/CBL

CD

COAXIAL

FM

ANT

OPTICAL

SUB

WOOFER

S VIDEO

RL

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

MD/CD-R

75 UNBAL.

SPEAKERS

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND

BACK

R

RLL

+

+

+

+++

+

+

A

B

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

12 3 4

56 78 9 0

(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 9 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

SPEAKER SETUP

10

The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R

speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and

multi-channel audio sources.

Front speakers (FR and FL)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus

effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from

the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker

from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds

(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical

to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,

however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front

face of the center speaker with the front face of your video

monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front

speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as

directly over or under it.

Surround speakers (SR and SL)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround

sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening

position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above

the floor.

Surround back speaker (SB)

The surround back speaker supplements the surround

speakers and provides for more realistic front-to-back

transitions. Place this speaker directly behind the listening

position and at the same height as the surround speakers.

Subwoofer

The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active

Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only

for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,

but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and

DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so

critical, because low bass sounds are not highly

directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the

front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the

room to reduce wall reflections.

SPEAKER SETUP

Speaker placement

60˚

30˚

SB

FL

FR

C

SL

SR

SR

80˚

SL

1.8 m (6 ft)

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 10 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

11

English

SPEAKER SETUP

PREPARATION

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),

“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the

polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound

will be unnatural and lack bass.

If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set

this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 6

ohms before using (see page 20).

Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the

power of this unit is off.

Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do

not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This

could damage this unit and/or speakers.

Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of

speakers still creates the interference with the monitor,

place the speakers away from the monitor.

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped

differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.

Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)

terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain

cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

1Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8″) of

insulation from the end of each speaker

cable.

2Twist the exposed wires of the cable together

to prevent short circuits.

3Unscrew the knob.

4Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side

of each terminal.

5Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

Banana plug connections

(With the exception of U.K. and Europe models)

First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug

connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.

Speaker connections

CAUTION

10 mm (3/8″)

12

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

34

5

Banana plug

(With the exception of U.K. and

Europe models)

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 11 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

12

SPEAKER SETUP

FRONT terminals

Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If

you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the

FRONT A or B terminals.

The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems

simultaneously.

CENTER terminals

Connect a center speaker to these terminals.

SURROUND terminals

Connect surround speakers to these terminals.

SUB WOOFER jack

Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

to this jack.

SURROUND BACK terminals

Connect a surround back speaker to these terminals.

OUTPUT

SUB

WOOFER

SPEAKERS

FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND

BACK

R

RLL

+

+

+

+

++

+

+

A

B

2 3 6 71

54

Subwoofer

system

Center

speaker

Front speakers (A)

Surround back

speaker

LeftRight

LeftRight

Surround speakers

Front

speakers

(B)

(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)

Note 1

2

3

4

5

7

6

Speaker layout

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 12 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

CONNECTIONS

13

English

PREPARATION

Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains

power until all connections between components are

complete.

Cable indications

Analog jacks

You can input analog signals from audio components by

connecting audio pin cable to the analog jacks on this unit.

Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the

left jacks.

Digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital

signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You

can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both

the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to

the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital

input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital

signals.

This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus

audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the

analog OUT (REC) jacks.

[ HTR-5750 only ] Likewise audio signals input to the digital

(OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the DIGITAL

OUTPUT jack.

Dust protection cap

Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect

the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are

not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in

place. This cap protects the jack from dust.

Video jacks

[ HTR-5750 ]

This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.

The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit

are automatically converted for output through the VIDEO

jacks. When V CONV. is set to ON (see page 49), signals

input through the VIDEO jacks can be output through the

S VIDEO jacks.

[ HTR-5740 ]

This unit has two types of video jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.

VIDEO jack

For conventional composite video signals.

S VIDEO jack ( HTR-5750 only )

For S-Video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color

reproduction.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in

picture reproduction.

[ HTR-5750 only ] When signals are input through both the S

VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO

jack have priority.

CONNECTIONS

Before connecting components

Note

CAUTION

S

V

O

V

L

R

C

left analog cables

right analog cables

optical cables

coaxial cables

video cables

S-Video cables

For analog signals

For digital signals

For video signals

Note

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

R

P

B

Y

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

P

R

P

B

Y

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 13 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

14

CONNECTIONS

Connections for DVD playback

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Signal flow inside this unit (HTR-5750)

Only when V CONV. is set to ON

(see page 49).

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Input

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Signal flow inside this unit (HTR-5740)

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Input

Connecting video components

MONITOR OUT

AUDIO

VIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

VIDEO

RL

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

PR

DVD

MONITOR

OUT

PB Y

DVD

S VIDEO

LR

O

DVD player

Video

monitor

(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)

Optical out Video out

Audio out

Video in

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 14 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

15

English

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and

SUB WOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-

amplifier.

Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to

match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.

When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you

cannot select sound field programs.

This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that

you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.

When headphones are used, only front left and right channels are output.

Notes

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

SURROUND

RL

LR

LR

Multi-format player/

External decoder

Front

out

Surround

out

Subwoofer

out

Center

out

(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 15 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

16

CONNECTIONS

Connections for other video components

VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a

game console or video camera, to this unit.

AUDIO

VIDEO

S VIDEO

DTV

/CBL

VIDEO

RL

OUT

VCR

IN

COMPONENT VIDEO

PR

DTV

/CBL

PB Y

DIGITAL

INPUT

DTV/CBL

CD

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

O

LR

LR LR

Cable TV or

satellite tuner

(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)

DVD recorder

or VCR

Audio out

Video out

Optical out

Audio out Video out

Video in

Audio in

VIDEO L AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

V

L

R

Game

console or

video camera

Video out

Audio out L

Audio out R

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 16 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

17

English

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Connections for audio components

Connecting audio components

AUDIO

RL

IN

(PLAY)

(REC)

MD

/CD-R

CD

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

OPTICAL

MD/CD-R

CD

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

MD/CD-R

L

R

LR LR

O O

C

CD player

MD recorder or

tape deck

(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)

Coaxial out

Audio out

Audio in

Audio out

Optical in

Optical out

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 17 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

18

CONNECTIONS

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this

unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient

signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the

designated terminals.

Connecting the AM loop antenna

1Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it

to the terminals on this unit.

2Press and hold the tab to insert

the AM loop antenna lead wires

into the AM ANT and GND

terminals.

3Orient the AM loop antenna

for the best reception.

The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an

outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest

authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor

antennas.

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter

(U.K. model only)

1Open the cover of the

included 75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter.

2Cut the external sleeve

of the 75-ohm coaxial

cable and prepare it for

connection.

3Cut the lead wire and

remove it.

4Insert the cable

wire into the slot,

and clamp it with

pliers.

5Snap the cover

into place.

Connecting the antennas

TUNER

AM

ANT

GND

FM

ANT

75 UNBAL.

AM loop antenna

(included)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum interference,

connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth

ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven

into moist earth.

Indoor FM antenna

(included)

(HTR-5750 U.S.A. model)

Notes

11 (7/16)

8 (5/16)

6 (1/14)

Unit:

mm (in.)

Lead wire

Clamp

Clamp

Insert wire into

slot.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 18 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

19

English

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Connecting the AC power cord

Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.

AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.K. and Australia models………….…………..… 1 OUTLET

Korea model..………..………..………..…………..……….. None

Other models…………………….…………..……….. 2 OUTLETS

Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your

other components to this unit. Power to the AC

OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON

(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). The outlet(s)

supply power to any connected component whenever this

unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power

consumption of components) that can be connected to the

AC OUTLET(S) is:

Korea model..………..………..………..…………..………..….. N/A

Other models ….………..…………………..………………… 100 W

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from

being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC

wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one

week, the stored data will be lost.

Connecting the power supply cord

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 19 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

20

CONNECTIONS

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

Do not change the setting of the IMPEDANCE

SELECTOR switch when the unit power is switched on,

as doing so may damage the unit.

If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON is pressed

on either the front panel or remote control, the

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to

either position. If this is the case, slide the switch all the

way to either position when this unit is in standby mode.

Select the switch position (left or right) according to the

impedance of the speakers in your system.

*The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems (A and B) simultaneously when the switch is set to the right position.

CAUTION

SET BEFORE POWER ON

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

Switch position Speaker Impedance level

Left

Front

If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be

4 or higher.

If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be

8 or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 6 or higher.Center, Surround, Surround back

Right

Front

If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be

8 or higher.

If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be

16 or higher.*

The impedance of each speaker must be 8 or higher.Center, Surround, Surround back

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 20 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

21

English

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

When all connections are complete, turn on the power of

this unit.

1Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the

remote control) to turn on the power of this

unit.

2Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

Turning on the power

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

1

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

1

(U.S.A. model)

STANDBY

/ON

SYSTEM

POWER

or

Front panel Remote control

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 21 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

BASIC SETUP

22

The basic setup feature is a useful way to set up your

system quickly and with minimal effort.

y

If you wish to configure the unit manually using more precise

adjustments, use the detailed parameters in SOUND MENU

(page 46) instead of using BASIC SETUP.

Altering any parameters in BASIC SETUP will reset all

parameters in SOUND MENU.

Before you begin:

Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel to select

the main speakers you want to use.

Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this

unit.

1Press AMP.

2Press SET MENU.

“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.

3Press SELECT to enter BASIC SETUP.

The ROOM parameter appears in the front panel

display.

4Press j / i to select the desired setting.

ROOM: S M >L

Select the size of the room you have installed your

speakers in. Roughly speaking, the room sizes are

defined as follows:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

S (small) 16 x 13ft, 200ft2 (4.8 x 4.0m, 20m2)

M (medium) 20 x 16ft, 300ft2 (6.3 x 5.0m, 30m2)

L (large) 26 x 19ft, 450ft2 (7.9 x 5.8m, 45m2)

[Other models]

S (small) 3.6 x 2.8m, 10m2

M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0m, 20m2

L (large) 6.3 x 5.0m, 30m2

5Press d to display the SUBWOOFER

parameter.

6 Press j / i to select the desired setting.

YES If you have a subwoofer in your system.

NONE If you do not have a subwoofer in your system.

BASIC SETUP

Using the BASIC SETUP menu

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

FREQ/RDS EONSTART

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

MODE PTY SEEK

TEST

STRAIGHT

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

SELECT

PRESET/CH

13-13

2

AMP

MENU

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

BASIC SETUP

SELECT

PRESET/CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

SUBWOOFER YES

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 22 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

23

English

BASIC SETUP

PREPARATION

7Press d to display the SPEAKERS

parameter.

8Press j / i to select the number of speakers

you connected.

SPEAKERS 6spk

9Press d to display SET/CANCEL.

10 Press j / i to select the desired setting.

>SET CANCEL

SET To apply the settings you chose in steps

4 through 8.

CANCEL To cancel the setup without making any

changes.

11 Press SELECT to confirm your selection.

If you selected SET, you hear a test tone from each

speaker in turn. “CHECK:Test Tone” appears in the

front panel display for a few seconds, then “CHECK:

OK?”.

CHECK:TestTone

CHECK OK? YES

12 Press j / i to select the desired setting.

CHECK OK? YES

YES To complete the setup process if the test tone

levels from each speaker were satisfactory.

NO To proceed to the SP LEVEL speaker level

adjustment menu to balance the level of each

speaker.

13 Press SELECT to confirm your selection.

If you selected NO in step 12, the front speaker level

adjustment display appears in the front panel display.

Choices Display Speakers

2spk

Front L/R

3spk

Front L/R, Center

4spk

Front L/R, Surround L/R

5spk

Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R

6spk

Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,

Surround back

SELECT

PRESET/CH

LL CR

SL SB SR

LL CR

SL SB SR

LL CR

SL SB SR

LL CR

SL SB SR

LL C R

SL SB

SR

LL C R

SL SB SR

SELECT

PRESET/CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 23 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

24

BASIC SETUP

To balance the speaker levels

Perform the following steps after step 13 (see page 23).

The unit outputs the test tone from the selected speaker

and the left front (or left surround) speaker in turn. The

indicator of the speaker currently outputting the test tone

flashes in the front panel display.

1Press d / u to select a speaker, then use j / i

to adjust the balance.

FR——||——

Adjusts the balance between the front left and right

speakers.

C——||——

Adjusts the balance between the front left and center

speakers.

SL——||——

Adjusts the balance between the front left and

surround left speakers.

SB——||——

Adjusts the balance between the surround left and

surround back speakers.

SR——||——

Adjusts the balance between the surround left and

surround right speakers.

SWFR——||——

Adjusts the balance between the front left speaker

and the subwoofer.

2Press SET MENU to exit after balancing the

speakers.

y

You can also balance the speaker levels using test tone by

pressing TEST on the remote control.

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LR

SB

q

DIGITAL

t

FR——||——

C

SL SR

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, if the power cord is disconnected from the

AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one

week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the

items again.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 24 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

PLAYBACK

25

English

BASIC

OPERATION

1Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the

remote control) to turn on the power.

2Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

3Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel.

Each press turns the respective speakers on or off.

4Select the input source.

Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons

on the remote control) to select the input you desire.

The current input source name and input mode appear

in the front panel display and video monitor for a few

seconds.

5Start playback or select a broadcast station

on the source component.

Refer to the operating instructions for the component.

6Adjust the volume to the desired output level.

PLAYBACK

Basic operations

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

1 7 43 6

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

MUTE

VOLUME

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

PRESET/CH

7

6

1

4

7

(U.S.A. model)

STANDBY

/ON

SYSTEM

POWER

Front panel Remote control

or

SPEAKERS

B

A

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

INPUT

Front panel

Remote control

or

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

01DDVDDAUTO00

Selected input source Input mode

VOLUME

VOLUME

or

Remote control

Front panel

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 25 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

26

PLAYBACK

7Select a sound field program if desired.

Press PROGRAM l / h repeatedly (or press AMP

on the remote control to select the AMP mode, then

press one of the sound field program buttons

repeatedly) to select a sound field program. (See

page 39 for details about sound field programs.)

To listen with headphones (SILENT CINEMA)

“SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS

surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT

CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect

headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to

CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When

activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in

the front panel display.

This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI

CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

“SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when the Direct Stereo or

2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode.

To adjust the tone

You can adjust the tonal quality

of your front left and right

speakers or headphones (when

connected).

Press CONTROL on the front

panel repeatedly to select

TREBLE or BASS, then press

BASS/TREBLE –/+ repeatedly to

increase or decrease.

Select TREBLE to adjust the

high frequency response.

Select BASS to adjust the low

frequency response.

To cancel the tone control, press CONTROL repeatedly to

select BYPASS.

y

Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.

If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-frequency

sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround

speakers may not match that of the front left and right speakers.

CONTROL is not effective with the Direct Stereo program

(page 30) or MULTI CH INPUT.

To mute the sound

Press MUTE on the remote control.

The MUTE indicator blinks in the

front panel display.

To resume the audio output, press

MUTE again (or press VOLUME –/+).

The MUTE indicator disappears from

the display.

y

You can adjust the muting level (see page 48).

Notes

l PROGRAM h

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

AMP

Remote control

Front panel

or

Notes

CONTROL

BASS/TREBLE

MUTE

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 26 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

27

English

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

Selecting MULTI CH INPUT

Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT”

appears in the front panel display and video monitor.

MULTI CH INPUT

When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display,

no other source can be played. To select another input source with

INPUT (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH

INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” in the front panel

display.

Playing video sources in the

background

You can combine a video image from a video source with

sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy

listening to classical music while viewing beautiful

scenery from the video source on the video monitor.

Use the input selector buttons on the remote

control to select a video source, then select an

audio source.

If you want to enjoy audio from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks

together with a video source, first select the video source, then

press MULTI CH INPUT.

Front panel operation

Press PROGRAM l / h repeatedly to select the

desired program.

The name of the selected program appears in the front

panel display and video monitor.

Note

Note

MULTI CH

INPUT

MULTI CH IN

Front panel Remote control

or

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

Audio sources

Video sources

Selecting sound field programs

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

PROGRAM

(U.S.A. model)

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

01DJAZZACLUBO00

Program name

l PROGRAM h

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 27 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

28

PLAYBACK

Remote control operation

Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press

one of the sound field program buttons

repeatedly to select the desired program.

The name of the selected program appears in the front

panel display.

y

Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening

preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.

When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with that source.

Sound field programs cannot be selected when MULTI CH

INPUT is selected.

Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/

24 signals) will be sampled down to 48 kHz, then sound field

programs will be applied.

Enjoying multi-channel software

If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature

to enjoy 6.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources

using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital Surround

EX or DTS-ES decoders.

Press AMP on the remote control to select the

AMP mode, then press EX/ES to switch between

5.1 and 6.1-channel playback.

To select a decoder, press j / i repeatedly while

PLIIxMusic (etc.) is displayed.

AUTO (AUTO)

When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is

input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing

back the signal in 6.1 channels.

If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in

the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1

channels.

Decoders (select with j / i)

You can select from the following decoders depending on

the format of the software you are playing.

PLIIxMusic

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1

channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder.

EX/ES

For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1 channels

using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder.

DTS signals are played back in 6.1 channels using the

DTS-ES decoder.

EX

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1

channels using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder.

OFF (OFF)

Decoders are not used to create 6.1 channels.

Notes

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHT

q/DTS

EFFECT

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

Sound field

program

buttons

AMP

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

01DJAZZACLUBO00

AMP

Program name

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

10

EX/ES

AMP

SELECT

PRESET/CH

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 28 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

29

English

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)

which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these

kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select a decoder manually

(PLIIx Music, EX/ES or EX).

6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EX/ES is pressed in

the following cases:

When “SURR LR” (see page 46) or “SURR B” (see page 46)

is set to NONE.

When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is

being played.

When the source being played does not contain surround left

and right channel signals.

When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

When “2ch Stereo” or “Direct Stereo” is selected.

When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be

reset to AUTO.

When the DTS-ES decoder is applied to DTS 96/24 signals, you

cannot use the DTS 96/24 decoding feature.

The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SURR B” is

set to NONE (see page 46).

Enjoying 2-channel software

Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played

back on multiple channels.

Press q/DTS on the remote control to select the

decoder.

You can select from the following decoders depending on

the type of software you are playing and your personal

preference.

PRO LOGIC SUR. STANDARD

Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.

PRO LOGIC SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround

sources.

PRO LOGIC IIx Movie*

Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for movie software.

PRO LOGIC IIx Music*

Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for music software.

PRO LOGIC IIx Game*

Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for game software.

DTS Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie software.

DTS Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music software.

*Use the PLII/PLIIx parameter to select the Pro Logic II or Pro

Logic IIx decoders (see page 40).

The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SURR B” is set

to NONE (see page 46).

Notes

Note

9

q/DTS

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 29 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

30

PLAYBACK

Listening to high fidelity stereo sound

(Direct Stereo)

Direct Stereo allows you to bypass this unit’s decoders and

DSP processors to enjoy pure high fidelity sound from 2-

channel PCM and analog sources.

Press PROGRAM l / h repeatedly (or press

AMP to select the AMP mode, then press

STEREO repeatedly) to select “Direct Stereo”.

Direct Stereo

To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in

this mode.

When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input,

this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog

input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will

be heard.)

No sound will be output from the subwoofer.

CONTROL (page 26) and SET MENU (page 44) settings are

not effective.

The front panel display automatically dims.

Night listening modes

The night listening modes are designed to improve

listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either

NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the

type of material you are playing.

Press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to

select cinema or music.

When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in

the front panel display lights up.

Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.

Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources

to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

Select OFF if you do not want to use this function.

Press j / i to adjust the effect level while

NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed.

This adjusts the level of compression.

Select MIN for minimum compression.

Select MID for standard compression.

Select MAX for maximum compression.

y

NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored

independently.

You cannot use the night listening modes with the Direct Stereo

program or MULTI CH INPUT (even though the NIGHT

indicator lights up when Direct Stereo is selected).

The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending

on the input source and surround sound settings you use.

Notes

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

AMP

Front panel

or

l PROGRAM h

Remote control

Notes

0

NIGHT

Remote control

SELECT

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Effect.Lvl:MID

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 30 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

31

English

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

Downmixing to 2 channels

You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback even from multi-

channel sources.

Press PROGRAM l / h repeatedly (or press

STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch

Stereo.

2ch Stereo

y

You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or

BOTH is selected in “BASS OUT”.

Listening to unprocessed input signals

In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are

output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-

channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate

channels without any additional effect processing.

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select STRAIGHT.

STRAIGHT

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) again so that “STRAIGHT”

disappears from the display when you want to turn the

sound effect back on.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates

virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.

If you do not connect surround speakers, Virtual CINEMA

DSP activates automatically whenever you select a

CINEMA DSP sound field program.

Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when “SURR LR”

is set to NONE (see page 46) in the following cases:

When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the

following to select the type of input signals you want to

use.

1Rotate INPUT to select the input source.

2Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode.

In most cases, use AUTO.

AUTO Automatically selects input signals in

the following order:

1) Digital signals*

2) Analog signals

DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in

DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no

sound is output.

ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no

analog signals are input, no sound is

output.

* If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the

decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound

field program.

y

You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the

power is turned on (see page 49).

Note

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

Front panel

or

l PROGRAM h

Remote control

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

STRAIGHT

ENTER

EFFECT

Front panel Remote control

or

Selecting input modes

INPUT

INPUT MODE

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

01DDVDDAUTO00

Input modeInput source

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 31 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

32

PLAYBACK

When you play DTS-encoded CD/LDs with the input mode set

to AUTO:

This unit automatically switches to the DTS decoding mode.

The unit remains in DTS mode (and the t indicator may

flash) for up to 30 seconds after playback of the DTS source is

complete. To manually release the DTS mode, press INPUT

MODE to reselect AUTO.

The DTS decoding mode may be released if search or skip

operations are performed for more than 30 seconds. To

prevent this, press INPUT MODE to select DTS.

If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any

way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you

make a digital connection between this unit and the player.

Displaying the information about the input

source

You can display the type, format and sampling frequency

of the current input signal.

1Select the input source.

2Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then

press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) so that

“STRAIGHT” appears in the display.

STRAIGHT

3Press u / d to display the following

information about the input signal.

(Format) Signal format display. When the unit

cannot detect a digital signal it

automatically switches to analog input.

in Number of source channels in the input

signal. For example, a multi-channel

soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2

surround channels and LFE, is

displayed as “3/2/LFE”.

fs Sampling frequency. When the unit is

unable to detect the sampling

frequency “Unknown” appears.

rate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to

detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears.

flg Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby

Digital signals that cue this unit to

automatically switch decoders.

Notes

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

STRAIGHT

ENTER

EFFECT

AMP

then

SELECT

PRESET/CH

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 32 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

TUNING

33

English

BASIC

OPERATION

There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

Automatic tuning

1Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input

source.

2Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the

front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to

turn the colon (:) off.

4Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin

automatic tuning.

Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l

to tune into a lower frequency.

When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator

lights up and the frequency of the received station is

shown in the front panel display.

TUNING

Automatic and manual tuning

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

3 312 4

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

Front panel

FM/AM

or AM

FM

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

TUNING MODE

AUTO

Lights up

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

TUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

T CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO ME

SLEEP

UAL

A B

SP

A

-AAM11440kkHz

TUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

T CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO ME

SLEEP

UAL

A B

SP

A

-AAM11530kkHz

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 33 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

34

TUNING

Manual tuning

If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,

tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station

will automatically switch the tuner to monaural reception

to increase the signal quality.

1Select TUNER and the reception band

following steps 1 and 2 as described in

“Automatic tuning”.

2Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the AUTO indicator disappears from

the front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to

turn the colon (:) off.

3Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into

the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to

continue searching.

Automatically presetting FM stations

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations. This function enables this unit to

automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals,

and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through

E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any

preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.

1Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

2Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the

front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to

turn the colon (:) off.

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

TUNING MODE

AUTO

Disappears

TUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

T CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO ME

SLEEP

UAL

A B

SP

A

-AAM11440kkHz

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

Presetting stations

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

231

(U.S.A. model)

FM/AM

FM

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

TUNING MODE

AUTO

Lights up

TUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

T CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO ME

SLEEP

UAL

A B

SP

A

-AAM11440kkHz

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 34 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

35

English

TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

3Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

for more than 3 seconds.

The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO

indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic

presetting starts from the frequency currently

displayed and proceeds toward the higher

frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8),

automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after

searching all stations.

Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually

and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting

stations”.

Automatic preset tuning options

You can select the preset number from which this unit will

store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower

frequencies.

After pressing MEMORY in step 3:

1Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to

select the preset number under which the first station

will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when

stations have all been stored up to E8.

2Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon

(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin

tuning toward the lower frequencies.

Manually presetting stations

You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups)

manually.

1Tune into a station.

See page 33 for tuning instructions.

When tuned into a station, the front panel display

shows the frequency of the station received.

2Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.

3Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset

station group (A to E) while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)

appears in the front panel display.

Notes

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If

so, store the stations again by using the presetting

station methods.

MAN’L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

A11:FM187.5kMHz

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

43 2,5

(U.S.A. model)

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

A11:AM18630kkHz

MAN’L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

MEMORY

Flashes

NEXT

A/B/C/D/E

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

C11:AM18630kkHz

Preset group

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 35 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

36

TUNING

4Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a

preset station number (1 through 8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

Press h to select a higher preset station number.

Press l to select a lower preset station number.

5Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the

front panel while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The station band and

frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset

group and number you have

selected.

6Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the

preset station number under which it was stored.

When performing this operation with the remote

control, first press TUNER to set the remote to

tuner mode.

1Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station

group.

The preset group letter appears in the front panel

display and changes each time you press the button.

2Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET/CH

u / d on the remote control) to select a

preset station number (1 to 8).

The preset group and number appear in the front

panel display along with the station band, frequency

and the TUNED indicator lights up.

Notes

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

C13:AM18630kkHz

Preset number

MAN’L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

C13:AM18630kkHz

Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.

Selecting preset stations

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

2

1

REC

AUDI O

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

1009

ENTER

EX/ESNIGHT

q/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

SELECT

PRESET/CH

2

1

(U.S.A. model)

NEXT

A/B/C/D/E

MENU

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

or

Front panel Remote control

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

E11:FM187.5kMHz

SELECT

PRESET/CH

or

Front panel

Remote control

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 36 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

37

English

TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E

and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

See “Selecting preset stations”.

2Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for

more than 3 seconds.

“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

3Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E

and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

4Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset assignments are

exchanged.

Exchanging preset stations

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

2,4 1,31,3

(U.S.A. model)

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

E11:FM187.5kMHz

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

A15:FM190.6kMHz

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

NEXT

A/B/C/D/E

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

E1 EDIT18E1-A5Hz

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 37 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

RECORDING

38

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed from the recording components. Refer to the

operating instructions for those components.

1Turn on the power of this unit and all

connected components.

2Select the source component you want to

record from.

3Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4Start recording on the recording component.

y

Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record

between other components connected to this unit.

The setting of CONTROL, VOLUME, “SP LEVEL” (page 47)

and the sound field programs does not affect recorded material.

A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit

cannot be recorded.

[ HTR-5750 only ] S-Video and composite video signals pass

independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore,

when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source

component is connected to provide only an S-Video (or only a

composite video) signal, you can record only an S-Video (or

only a composite video) signal to your VCR.

[ HTR-5750 ] Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT

jacks are not output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for

recording. Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN

(L/R) jacks are not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.

Therefore, if your source component is connnected to provide

only digital (or analog) signals, you can only record digital (or

analog) signals.

[ HTR-5740 ] Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT

jacks are not output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for

recording. You can only record analog signals.

A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT

channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR IN is not

output on VCR OUT.)

Check the copyright laws in your country to record from

records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may

infringe copyright laws.

Special considerations when recording

DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player

is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operating

instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will

be output from the player.

RECORDING

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

12

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

1

2

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

or

Front panel Remote control

Notes

If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 38 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

39

English

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multichannel playback from

almost any sound source (stereo or multichannel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field

processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous

concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.

y

The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to

AUTO (see page 31) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.

This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in

the actual hall, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.

Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.

You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”

can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel

(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

Notes

For movie/video sources

Program Features Sources

STEREO:

2ch Stereo

Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channels (left and right) or plays back 2-channel

sources as is.

MULTI

2-CH

MUSIC VIDEO This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling you are at

an actual jazz or rock concert.

ENTERTAINMENT:

Game

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.

TV THEATER:

Mono Movie

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The

program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presernce

sound field.

TV THEATER:

Variety/Sports

Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the

sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching

various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs.

MOVIE THEATER:

Spectacle

CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm

movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the

sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby

Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).

MOVIE THEATER:

Sci-Fi

CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the

latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space

amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced

techniques.

MOVIE THEATER:

Adventure

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of

the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to

that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained

as much as possible.

MOVIE THEATER:

General

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and

multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 39 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

40

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

*You can select either Pro Logic IIx or Pro Logic II processing using the PLII/PLIIx parameter on page 58.

DOLBY DIGITAL:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 5.1-channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

MULTI

DOLBY DIGITAL:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources.

DOLBY D EX:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1-channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

DOLBY D EX:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital

sources.

DTS:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 5.1-channel processing for DTS sources.

DTS 96/24:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 5.1-channel processing for 96-kHz/24-bit DTS sources.

DTS:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS and 96-kHz/24-bit DTS sources.

DTS+DOLBY EX:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.

DTS+DOLBY EX:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Mtrx6.1:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1-channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Mtrx6.1:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Disc6.1:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1-channel processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Disc6.1:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources.

PRO LOGIC:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.

2-CH

PRO LOGIC:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround sources.

PRO LOGIC IIx:

PLIIx Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.*

PRO LOGIC II:

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.*

PRO LOGIC IIx:

PLIIx Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.*

PRO LOGIC II:

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.*

DTS: Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software.

Program Features Sources

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 40 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

41

English

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.

*You can select either Pro Logic IIx or Pro Logic II processing using the PLII/PLIIx parameter on page 58.

For music sources

Program Features Sources

CONCERT HALL HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats.

Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full,

rich sound.

MULTI

2-CH

JAZZ CLUB HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous

New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering

a real and vibrant sound.

ROCK CONCERT HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this

program was recorded at LAs “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left

of the hall.

ENTERTAINMENT:

Disco

HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the

heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-

energy, “immediate” sound.

q D+PLIIx Music:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

MULTI

q D+PLIIx Music:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

DTS+PLIIx Music:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

DTS+PLIIx Music:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

STEREO:

2ch Stereo

2-channel (left and right) playback.

2-CH

STEREO:

Direct Stereo

Use to output stereo sources to only the front left and right speakers without any processing.

STEREO:

6ch Stereo

Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.

PRO LOGIC IIx:

PLIIx Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.*

PRO LOGIC II:

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.*

DTS: Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 41 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

42

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to the AC OUTLET(S).

Setting the sleep timer

1Select a source and start playback on the

source component.

2Press SLEEP repeatedly to set

the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front

panel display changes as shown

below. The SLEEP indicator flashes

while switching the amount of time

for the sleep timer.

The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel

display, and the display returns to the selected sound

field program.

Canceling the sleep timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in

the front panel display.

After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the

SLEEP indicator goes off.

y

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front

panel) to set this unit to the standby mode.

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Using the sleep timer

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

2

SLEEP

SLEEP 90min

SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF

SLEEP 120min

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

E1 SLEEP8120minz

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR

96

24

q

PL

q

EX

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

q

PL

q

PL x

A B

SP

ft

mS

dB

dB

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

q

DIGITAL

t

E1 CONCERT2HALLz

SLEEP indicator

SLEEP SLEEP OFF

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 42 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

43

English

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while

listening to a music source. This is also possible when

playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

Please note that this operation will override the level

adjustments made in “BASIC SETUP” (page 22), “SP

LEVEL” (page 47) and “Using the test tone” (page 43).

1Press AMP.

2Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the

speaker you want to adjust.

FRONT L Front left speaker level

CENTER Center speaker level

FRONT R Front right speaker level

SUR.R Surround right speaker level

SUR.B Surround back speaker level

SUR.L Surround left speaker level

SWFR Subwoofer level

y

Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by

pressing u / d.

3Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.

The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB.

4Press SELECT when you have completed

your adjustment.

y

This operation can also be performed using the controls on the

front panel. Press NEXT repeatedly to select the speaker you

want to adjust, then press LEVEL –/+ to adjust the output level.

You can use the test tone feature to manually balance your

speaker levels. Please note that this operation will override

the level adjustments made in “BASIC SETUP” (page 22),

“SP LEVEL” (page 47) and “Manually adjusting speaker

levels” (page 43). Use the test tone to set speaker levels so

that the volume from each speaker is identical when heard

from your listening position.

You cannot activate the test tone if headphones are connected to

the PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES

jack.

1Press AMP.

2Press TEST.

The unit outputs a test tone.

3Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker

you want to adjust.

TEST LEFT Front left speaker

TEST CENTER Center speaker

TEST RIGHT Front right speaker

TEST SUR.R Right surround speaker

TEST SUR.B Surround back speaker

TEST SUR.L Left surround speaker

TEST SUBWOOFER Subwoofer

4Press j / i to adjust speaker volumes.

5Press TEST when you have completed your

adjustment.

The test tone stops.

Manually adjusting speaker levels

AMP

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

VCR

PRESET/CH

SELECT

3

4

2

1

Using the test tone

Note

AMP

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHT

q/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

VCR

PRESET/CH

3,4

2,5

1

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 43 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

SET MENU

44

You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this

unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening

environment.

BASIC SETUP

Use to quickly setup basic system parameters (see page 22).

MANUAL SETUP

Use to adjust speaker and system settings.

1 SOUND MENU

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for

video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.

y

Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you perform “BASIC SETUP” (see page 22). You can

use SOUND MENU to make further adjustments.

2 INPUT MENU

Use to reassign digital input/outputs and select the input mode.

3 OPTION MENU

Use to adjust the optional system parameters.

SET MENU

Item Features Page

A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over

frequency. 46

B)SP LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 47

C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 47

D)CENTER GEQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 47

E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 47

F)D. RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 47

G)AUDIO SET Customizes the muting level and audio delay. 48

Item Features Page

A)I/O ASSIGN Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 48

B)INPUT MODE Selects the initial input mode of the source. 49

Item Features Page

A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. 49

B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings. 49

C)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 50

D)ZONE SET Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. 50

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 44 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

45

English

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

y

You can change SET MENU parameters while the unit is

reproducing sound.

You cannot change some SET MENU parameters while the unit

is in either cinema or music night listening mode.

1Press AMP.

2Press SET MENU.

“BASIC SETUP” appears in the front panel display.

3Press u / d to display MANUAL SETUP.

MANUAL SETUP

4Press SELECT to enter MANUAL SETUP.

1 SOUND MENU appears in the front panel display.

1 SOUND MENU

5Press u / d to display the desired menu.

1 SOUND MENU

2 INPUT MENU

3 OPTION MENU

6Press SELECT to enter the displayed menu.

Repeat steps 5 and 6 to navigate to and enter the items

you want to adjust.

To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN.

7Press u / d to select the item you want to

adjust, then press j / i to change the setting

of the item.

Repeat this operation to select and adjust each setting.

To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN.

8To exit, press SET MENU when finished.

Using SET MENU

Note

AMP

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHT

q/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

VCR

PRESET/CH

3-7

1

2,8

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, if the power cord is disconnected from the

AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one

week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the

items again.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 45 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

46

SET MENU

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate

for video signal processing delays when using LCD

monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU

parameters are set automatically when you perform

“BASIC SETUP” (see page 22).

Speaker set A)SPEAKER SET

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.

y

If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,

you can change these settings according to your preference.

Center speaker CENTER

Choices: LRG, SML, NONE

Select LRG if you have a large center speaker. The unit

directs the entire range of the center channel signal to

the center speaker.

Select SML if you have a small center speaker. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center

channel to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”.

Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The

unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front

left and right speakers.

Front speakers FRONT

Choices: LARGE, SMALL

Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The

unit directs the entire range of the front left and right

channel signals to the front left and right speakers.

Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front

channel to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”.

Surround left/right speakers SURR LR

Choices: LRG, SML, NONE

Select LRG if you have large surround left and right

speakers. The entire range of the surround channel

signal is directed to the surround left and right

speakers.

Select SML if you have small surround left and right

speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround

channel are directed to the speakers selected with

“BASS OUT”.

Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers.

This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP

mode (see page 31) and automatically set the surround

back speaker setting (SURR B) to NONE.

Surround back speaker SURR B

Choices: LRG, SML, NONE

Select LRG if you have a large surround back speaker.

Select SML if you have a small surround back speaker.

The low-frequency signals of the surround back

channel are directed to the speakers selected with

“BASS OUT”, and the rest of the frequency signals are

directed to the surround back speaker.

Select NONE if you do not have a surround back

speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back

channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.

Bass out BASS OUT

Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the

subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers

according to the characteristics of your system. This

setting also determines the routing of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS

sources.

Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRONT, BOTH

Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and

low-frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings.

Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and

low-frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the front speakers according to the speaker settings

(even if you have previously set the front speakers to

SMALL).

Select BOTH if you connect a subwoofer and you want

to output low-frequency signals from front channels to

both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and low-

frequency signals from other channels are also directed

to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use

this function to reinforce low-frequency signals using

the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs.

Cross over CrossOver

Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency

for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the

selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer.

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

Subwoofer phase SWFR PHASE

If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to

switch the phase of your subwoofer.

Choices: NRM (normal), REV (reverse)

Select NRM if you do not want to reverse the phase of

your subwoofer.

Select REV to reverse the phase of your subwoofer.

1 SOUND MENU

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 46 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

47

English

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Speaker level B)SP LEVEL

Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels

between the front left or surround left speakers and each

speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 46).

Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

FR adjusts the balance of the front left and front right

speakers.

C adjusts the balance of the front left and center

speakers.

SL adjusts the balance of the front left and surround

left speakers.

SB adjusts the balance of the surround left and

surround back speakers.

SR adjusts the balance of the surround left and

surround right speakers.

SWFR adjusts the balance of the front left speaker and

subwoofer.

y

To calibrate, use the test tone feature (see page 43).

Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE

Use this feature to manually input the distance of each

speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in

most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay

must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all

sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time.

Unit UNIT

Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)

Initial setting:

U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft)

Other models: meters (m)

Select meters to input speaker distances in meters.

Select feet to input speaker distances in feet.

Speaker distances

Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft)

FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.

Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker.

Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

SURR L adjusts the distance of the surround left

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

SURR R adjusts the distance of the surround right

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

SURR B adjusts the distance of the surround back

speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)

SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial

setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ

Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic

equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of

the center speaker matches that of the left and right main

speakers. You can make adjustments listening to the

currently selected source component or a test tone.

You can adjust 5 frequency bands:

100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz, 10kHz

Choices: –6 to +6 dB

Select ON to output test tones from the front left and

center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the

center speaker.

Select OFF to stop the test tone and output the

currently selected source component.

Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL

Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency

effect) channel according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-

frequency special effects which are only added to certain

scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit

decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Choices: –20 to 0 dB

Speaker SP LFE

Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.

Headphone HP LFE

Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the “LFE LEVEL” setting, some signals may not

be output from the SUB WOOFER OUTPUT jack.

Dynamic range F)D. RANGE

Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to

be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is

effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and

DTS signals.

Choices: MAX (maximum), STD (standard), MIN

(minimum)

Speaker SP D.R

Select to adjust the speaker compression.

Headphone HP D.R

Select to adjust the headphone compression.

Select MAX for feature films.

Select STD for general use.

Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume

levels.

Note

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 47 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

48

SET MENU

Audio set G)AUDIO SET

Use to customize this units overall audio settings.

Audio mute A.MUTE

Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the

output volume.

Choices: MUTE, –20 dB

Select MUTE to completely halt all output of sound.

Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.

Audio delay A.DELAY

Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the

video image. This may be necessary when using certain

LCD monitors or projectors.

Choices: 0 to 160 mS

Use to reassign digital input/outputs and select the input

mode.

Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGN

You can assign jacks according to the component to be

used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your

needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the

respective jacks and effectively connect more components.

Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the

corresponding component by using INPUT on the front

panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control.

For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A (C.V[A]) and B

(C.V[B])

Choices: DVD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR

[ HTR-5750 ]

For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 (OUT(1))

Choices: MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVD

For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2 (IN(2)), 3 (IN(3))

and 4 (IN(4))

Choices: CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVD,

MD/CD-R

For COAXIAL INPUT jack 5 (IN(5))

Choices: CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVD,

MD/CD-R

[ HTR-5740 ]

For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 1 (IN(1)) and

2 (IN(2))

Choices: CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVD,

MD/CD-R

For COAXIAL INPUT jack 3 (IN(3))

Choices: CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR, DVD,

MD/CD-R

You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the

COAXIAL jack.

2 INPUT MENU

Notes

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 48 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

49

English

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Input mode B)INPUT MODE

Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on

this unit (see page 31 for details about the input mode).

Choices: AUTO, LAST

Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect

the type of input signal and select the appropriate input

mode.

Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the

last input mode used for that source.

Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EX/ES button

will not be recalled.

Use to adjust the optional system parameters.

Display set A)DISPLAY SET

Dimmer DIMMER

Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

Choices: –4 to 0

Video conversion (HTR-5750 only) V CONV.

Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite

(VIDEO) signals to S-Video signals. This allows you to

output converted video signals from the S VIDEO jacks

when no S-Video signals are input.

Choices: ON, OFF

Select OFF not to convert any signals.

Select ON to convert composite signals to S-Video

signals.

Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT

jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video

connections (i.e., S-Video) between each component.

Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other system settings.

Choices: ON, OFF

Select ON to protect:

DSP program parameters

All SET MENU items

All speaker levels

When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use

the test tone or select any other SET MENU items.

Note

3 OPTION MENU

Note

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 49 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

50

SET MENU

Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI

Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound

field program within a sound field program group. When

you initialize a sound field program group, all of the

parameter values within that group revert to their initial

settings.

Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound field

program that you want to initialize.

An asterisk (*) next to a program number means that the

parameter values have been changed from their initial

settings.

You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter

settings once you initialize a sound field program group.

You cannot separately initialize individual sound field

programs.

You cannot initialize any program groups when “MEMORY

GUARD” is set to ON.

Zone set D)ZONE SET

Use to specify the location of speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS B terminals.

Speaker B set SP B

Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers

connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.

Choices: FRONT, ZONE B

Select FRONT to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B

when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B

terminals are set in the main room.

Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If

SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is

turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in

the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound

from SPEAKERS B only.

If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit

when “SP B” is set to ZONE B, the sound is output from both

headphones and SPEAKERS B.

If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to ZONE B,

the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.

Notes

Notes

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 50 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

51

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and

other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up remote control with the appropriate manufacturer

codes.

Controlling this unit

The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit

when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to activate

the AMP mode.

Controlling other components

The shaded areas below can be used to control other

components. Each button has a different function

depending on the selected components. Select the

component you want to control by pressing an input

selector button.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Control area

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

DISC SKIP

FREQ/RDS EONSTART

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

MODE PTY SEEK

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

SELECT

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

PRESET/CH

The buttons in the

dotted lines

(SYSTEM

POWER,

STANDBY,

SLEEP, MULTI CH

IN, VOLUME +/–

and MUTE)

function in any

mode.

Press AMP to

control this unit.

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

DISC SKIP

FREQ/RDS EONSTART

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

MODE PTY SEEK

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

SELECT

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

FREQ/RDS EONSTARTMODE PTY SEEK

/ buttons and the

input selector buttons switch

the function of the

component control area

below.

* Use the / buttons to

control other components

regardless of whether they

are connected to this unit.

Component control

area

You can control up to 9

different components by

setting appropriate

manufacturer codes (see

page 52).

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 51 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

52

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate manufacturer codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area. For a complete list of available

manufacturer codes, refer to “LIST OF

MANUFACTURER CODES” at the end of this manual.

The following table shows the factory preset component

(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code

for each area.

You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even

if a YAMAHA manufacturer code is initially set as listed above.

In this case, try to set other YAMAHA manufacturer code(s).

1Press an input selector button or / to

select the component you want to set up.

2Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

3Press the numeric buttons to enter the four

digit manufacturer’s code for the component

to be used.

Refer to “LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES” at

the end of this manual.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,

try each of them until you find the correct one.

If you wait for more than 30 seconds during step 3, the setup

process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2.

Setting manufacturer codes

Input

area

Component

category

(Library)

Manufacturer Code

CD CD YAMAHA 0005

MD/CD-R MD YAMAHA 0024

TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 0003

DVD DVD YAMAHA 0098

DTV/CBL –

V-AUX –

VCR –

––

––

Note

Notes

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 52 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

53

English

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Once you set the appropriate manufacturer codes, you can

use this remote to control your other components. Note

that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected

component. Use the input selector buttons to select the

component you want to operate. The remote control

automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for

that component.

*1 This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.

*2 These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in DTV/CBL or .

When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in both the DTV/CBL and areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/

CBL area.

*3 These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR if the manufacturer code is set in VCR.

Controlling other components

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

MUTE

VOLUME

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

FREQ/RDS EONSTART

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

MODE PTY SEEK

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

SELECT

PRESET/CH

4

3

2

5

6

7

8

9

B

D

0

1

A

C

DVD player/

DVD recorder VCR Digital TV/

Cable TV CD player MD/CD recorder Tuner

1AV P OW E R Power *1 Power *1 VCR power *3 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1

2TV POWER TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2

3TV CH + TV channel up *2 TV channel up *2 TV channel up TV channel up *2 TV channel up *2 TV channel up *2

TV CH – TV channel down *2 TV channel down *2 TV channel down TV channel down *2 TV channel down *2 TV channel down *2

4TV VOL + TV volume up *2 TV volume up *2 TV volume up TV volume up *2 TV volume up *2 TV volume up *2

TV VOL – TV volume down *2 TV volume down *2 TV volume down TV volume down *2 TV volume down *2 TV volume down *2

5TV MUTE TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2

6TV INPUT TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2

71-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8)

8TITLE Title

9PRESET/CH uUp VCR channel up Preset up

PRESET/CH dDown VCR channel down Preset down

PRESET/CH jRight

PRESET/CH iLeft

0RETURN Return

AREC/DISC

SKIP

Disc skip (player)

Rec (recorder) Rec VCR rec *3 Rec (MD)

pPlay Play VCR play *3 Play Play

wSearch backward Search backward VCR search

backward *3 Search backward Search backward

fSearch forward Search forward VCR search forward *3 Search forward Search forward

AUDIO Audio

ePause Pause VCR pause *3 Pause Pause

bSkip backward Skip backward Skip backward

aSkip forward Skip forward Skip forward

sStop Stop VCR stop *3 Stop Stop

BENTER Title/Index Enter Enter Index Index

CMENU Menu A/B/C/D/E

DDISPLAY Display Display Display Display

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 53 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

54

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Clearing a setup manufacturer code for

component control

1Press an input selector button or / to

select the component control for which you

want to clear the manufacturer code.

2Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

3If you do not press any button within 30

seconds after step 2, the clearing process is

canceled. If this happens, start over from

step 1.

4Enter the code number “0000”.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice, and the manufacturer code for the

selected component is cleared.

y

You can clear all setup manufacturer codes at once by entering the

code number “9990”.

Clearing setup manufacturer codes

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

TRANSMIT

CODE SET

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 54 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

55

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument

are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In

addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections

enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size

and shape of the room in which we are sitting.

Elements of a sound field

In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming

straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are

two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to

make up the sound field:

Early reflections

Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms

– 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one

surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall.

Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.

Reverberations

These are caused by reflections from more than one

surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so

numerous that they merge together to form a continuous

sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen

the clarity of the direct sound.

Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent

reverberation taken together help us to determine the

subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this

information that the digital sound field processor

reproduces in order to create sound fields.

If you could create the appropriate early reflections and

subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you

would be able to create your own listening environment.

The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a

concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at

all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly

what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field

processor.

You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset

parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial

settings, you can change some of the parameters to better

suit the input source or your listening room.

1Press AMP.

2Select the sound field program you want to

adjust.

3Press u / d to select

the parameters.

4Press j / i to change

the parameter value.

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

What is a sound field Changing parameter settings

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

CD

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHT

q/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

SELECT

PRESET/CH

3,4

1

2

AMP

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

8

10

7

09

65

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHT

q/DTS

EFFECT

SELECT

PRESET/CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 55 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

56

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS

5Repeat steps 2 through 4 as necessary to

change other program parameters.

You cannot change parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD”

is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set

“MEMORY GUARD” to OFF (see page 49).

Resetting parameters to the factory

presets

To reset a certain parameter

Select the parameter you want to reset, then press j / i

repeatedly to select the factory preset (the display pauses

momentarily at the factory preset before proceeding to the

next value).

To reset all parameters

Use PARAM. INI (see page 50).

Note

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the parameter values will return to the

factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter

value again.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 56 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

57

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your

listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.

DSP LEVEL

Function: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.

Description: Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP

effect level relative to the level of the direct sound.

Control range: –6 dB – +3 dB

DELAY (Delay)

Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the

direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.

Description: The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther

it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value.

Control range: 1 99 msec

For 6ch Stereo

Function: These parameter adjusts the volume level for each channel in 6-channel stereo mode.

Control Range: 0 – 100%

CT LEVEL (Center level)

SL LEVEL (Surround left level)

SR LEVEL (Surround right level)

SB LEVEL (Surround back level)

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

Source Sound

Early

Reflections

Time Time Time

DELAY DELAY DELAY

Sound Source

Reflection Face

Level

Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms

Level

Level

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 57 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

58

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS

For PRO LOGIC IIx Music and PRO LOGIC II Music

PANORAMA

Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect.

Choices: OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF.

DIMENSION

Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.

Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard).

CT WIDTH (Center width)

Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the

center image towards the front left and right speakers.

Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only

from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3.

For PRO LOGIC IIx Movie, Music and Game

PLII/PLIIx (Pro Logic II/Pro Logic IIx)

Function: Switches the type of Pro Logic decoding to be used. PLII decoding creates 5.1-channel sound from

2-channel sources. PLIIx decoding creates 6.1-channel sound from 2-channel sources.

Choices: PLII, PLIIx

For DTS Neo:6 Music

C. IMAGE (Center image)

Function: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.

Control range: 0 – 0.5

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 58 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

TROUBLESHOOTING

59

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below

or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the

nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.

General

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy Refer to

page

This unit fails to turn

on when STANDBY/

ON (or SYSTEM

POWER) is pressed,

or enters in the

standby mode soon

after the power has

been turned on.

The power cord is not connected or the

plug is not completely inserted.

Connect the power cord firmly.

The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers. 20

The protection circuitry has been

activated.

Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit

and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for

each connection does not touch anything other than

its respective connection.

11-12

This unit has been exposed to a strong

external electric shock (such as lightning

and strong static electricity).

Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the

power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use

it normally.

No sound Incorrect input or output cable

connections.

Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

14-17

The input mode is set to DTS or

ANALOG.

Select AUTO. 31

No appropriate input source has been

selected.

Select an appropriate input source with INPUT,

MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons.

25

Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 11

The front speakers to be used have not

been selected properly.

Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or

B.

25

The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.

The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to

cancel a mute and adjust the volume.

26

The input mode is set to ANALOG while

playing a source encoded with a DTS

signal.

Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. 31

The signals this unit cannot reproduce are

being received from a source component

e.g.: a CD-ROM.

Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.

No picture The output and input for the picture are

connected to different types of video

jacks.

Turn on the video conversion function (HTR-5750

only).

49

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 59 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

60

TROUBLESHOOTING

Problem Cause Remedy Refer to

page

The sound suddenly

goes off.

The protection circuitry has been activated

because of a short circuit, etc.

Check that the impedance selector setting is correct. 20

Check that the speaker wires are not touching each

other and then turn this unit back on.

The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again.

The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute. 26

Only the speaker on

one side can be

heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,

the cables may be defective.

11

Incorrect balance settings in SET MENU. Adjust the SP LEVEL settings. 47

Only the center

speaker outputs

substantial sound.

When playing a monaural source with a

CINEMA DSP program, the source signal

is directed to the center channel, and the

front and surround speakers output effect

sounds.

No sound from the

effect speakers.

The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn them on. 31

You are using a source or program

combination that does not output sound

from all channels.

Try another sound field program. 27, 39

No sound from the

center speaker.

The output level of the center speaker is

set to minimum.

Raise the level of the center speaker. 47

“CENTER” in SET MENU is set to

NONE.

Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker. 46

One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (except

for 6ch Stereo) has been selected.

Try another sound field program. 27, 39

No sound from the

surround speakers.

The output level of the surround speakers

is set to minimum.

Raise the output level of the surround speakers. 47

“SURR LR” in SET MENU is set to

NONE.

Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and

right speakers.

46

A monaural source is being played with

STRAIGHT.

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn on the sound

fields.

No sound from the

surround back

speaker.

“SURR LR” in SET MENU is set to

NONE.

If the surround left and right speakers are set to

NONE, the surround back speaker setting is

automatically set to NONE. Select the appropriate

setting for the surround speakers.

46

“SURR B” in SET MENU is set to

NONE.

Select LRG or SML. 46

No sound from the

subwoofer.

“BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set to

FRONT when a Dolby Digital or DTS

signal is being played.

Select SWFR or BOTH. 46

“BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set to

SWFR or FRNT when a 2-channel source

is being played.

Select BOTH. 46

The source does not contain low bass

signals.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 60 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

61

English

TROUBLESHOOTING

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

Problem Cause Remedy Refer to

page

Dolby Digital or DTS

sources cannot be

played. (Dolby Digital

or DTS indicator in

the front panel

display does not light

up.)

The connected component is not set to

output Dolby Digital or DTS digital

signals.

Make an appropriate setting following the operations

instructions for your component.

The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. 31

A “humming” sound

can be heard.

Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem

persists, the cables may be defective.

The volume level

cannot be increased,

or the sound is

distorted.

The component connected to the OUT

(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.

Turn on the power to the component.

The sound effect

cannot be recorded.

It is not possible to record the sound effect

with a recording component.

[ HTR-5750 ]

A source cannot be

recorded by a digital

recording component

connected to this

DIGITAL OUTPUT

jack.

The source component is not connected to

this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks.

Connect the source component to the DIGITAL

INPUT jacks.

13-17, 38

Some components cannot record the

Dolby Digital or DTS sources.

A source cannot be

recorded by an

analog component

connected to the

AUDIO OUT jacks.

The source component is not connected to

this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks.

Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO

IN jacks.

13-17, 38

The sound field

parameters and some

other settings on this

unit cannot be

changed.

“MEMORY GUARD” in SET MENU is

set to ON.

Select OFF. 49

This unit does not

operate properly.

The internal microcomputer has been

frozen by an external electric shock (such

as lightning or excessive static electricity)

or by a power supply with low voltage.

Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and

then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.

“CHECK SP WIRES”

appears in the front

panel display.

Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 11

There is noise

interference from

digital or high-

frequency equipment,

or this unit.

This unit is too close to the digital or high

frequency equipment.

Move this unit further away from such equipment.

The picture is

disturbed.

The video source uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent dubbing.

This unit suddenly

turns into the standby

mode.

The internal temperature becomes too

high and the overheat protection circuitry

has been activated.

Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then

turn it back on.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 61 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

62

TROUBLESHOOTING

Tuner

Remote control

Problem Cause Remedy Refer

to page

FM

FM stereo reception is

noisy.

The characteristics of FM stereo

broadcasts may cause this problem

when the transmitter is too far away or

the antenna input is poor.

Check the antenna connections.

Try using a high-quality directional FM

antenna.

18

Use the manual tuning method. 34

There is distortion, and

clear reception cannot

be obtained even with a

good FM antenna.

There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate

multipath interference.

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 18

Use the manual tuning method. 34

Previously preset

stations can no longer

be tuned in.

This unit has been disconnected for a

long period.

Preset the stations again. 34

AM

The desired station

cannot be tuned in with

the automatic tuning

method.

The signal is weak or the antenna

connections are loose.

Tighten the AM loop antenna connections

and orient it for best reception.

Use the manual tuning method. 34

There are continuous

crackling and hissing

noises.

Noises result from lightning,

fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats

and other electrical equipment.

Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.

This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to

eliminate all noise.

There are buzzing and

whining noises.

A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV.

Problem Cause Remedy Refer to

page

The remote control

does not work nor

function properly.

Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum

range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-

axis from the front panel.

7

Direct sunlight or lighting (from an

inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is

striking the remote control sensor of this

unit.

Reposition this unit.

The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3

The manufacturer code was not correctly

set.

Set the manufacturer code correctly using the “LIST

OF MANUFACTURER CODES” at the end of this

manual.

52

Try to set another code for the same manufacturer

using the “LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES” at

the end of this manual.

52

Even if the manufacturer code is correctly

set, there are some models that do not

respond to the remote control.

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 62 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS

63

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

If you want to reset all of your unit’s parameters for any

reason, do the following. This procedure completely resets

ALL parameters, including the SET MENU, level, assign

and tuner presets.

Be sure this unit is in standby mode.

1Hold down STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front

panel and press STANDBY/ON.

“FACTORY PRESET” appears in the front panel

display.

y

To cancel the initialization procedure without making any

changes, press STANDBY/ON.

2Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select the

desired setting.

Reset To reset the unit to its factory presets.

Cancel To cancel without making any changes.

3Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your

selection.

If you selected “Reset”, the unit is reset to its factory

presets and switches to standby mode.

If you selected “Cancel”, the unit switches to standby

mode and nothing is reset.

RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS

VOLUME

AUTO/MAN’L MONO

VIDEO L AUDIO R

MAN’L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORY

FM/AMPRESET/TUNING

A/B/C/D/E

l PROGRAM h

BASS/TREBLE

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

INPUT MODE

CONTROL

STRAIGHT

SPEAKERSPHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

BA

MULTI CH

INPUT

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

STANDBY/ON STRAIGHT (EFFECT)

(U.S.A. model)

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 63 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

GLOSSARY

64

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives

you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3

front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround

stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio

channels. With an additional channel especially for bass

effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has

a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By

using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more

accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The

wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum

volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the

precise sound orientation generated using digital sound

processing provide listeners with previously unheard of

excitement and realism.

With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up

to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for

your enjoyment.

Dolby Digital Surround EX

Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output

channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a

matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the

2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby

Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks

recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this

additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and

realistic moving sound especially with scenes with

“flyover” and “fly-around” effects.

Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to

decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software.

This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel

playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center

channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of

only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic

technology). Music and Game modes are also available for

2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete

multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel

sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode

for movies (for 2-channel sources only) and a Game mode

for games.

Dolby Surround

Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system

to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front

left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog

(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound

effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces

sound within a narrow frequency range.

Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes

and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as

well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit

employs a digital signal processing system that

automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to

enhance moving sound effects and directionality.

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality

for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully

backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers

to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz

sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/

24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24

master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-

motion video for music programs and motion picture

soundtracks on DVD-video.

DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

Digital Surround

DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog

soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound

track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie

theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.

has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy

the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of

DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces

practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a

left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus

an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-

channels). The unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that

enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding the surround

back channel to existing 5.1-channel format.

Neo:6

Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6

channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables

playback with the full-range channels with higher

separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two

modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music

sources and “Cinema mode” for movies.

GLOSSARY

Audio formats

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 64 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

65

English

GLOSSARY

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

CINEMA DSP

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were

originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed

for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room

size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can

differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in

the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually

measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses

YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine

Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to

provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater

in the listening room of your own home.

SILENT CINEMA

YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect

DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound

field so that accurate representations of all the sound field

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP

algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field

surround effects even without any surround speakers by

using virtual surround speakers.

It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a

minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center

speaker.

ITU-R

ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU

(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R

recommends a standard speaker placement which is used

in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering

purposes.

LFE 0.1 channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a

low frequency range compared to the full-range

reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or

DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.

PCM (Linear PCM)

Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog

audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without

using any compression. This is used as a method of

recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a

technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per

very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code

modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and

then modulated for recording.

Sampling frequency and number of

quantized bits

When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of

times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the number of quantized bits.

The range of rates that can be played back is determined

based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range

representing the sound level difference is determined by

the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the

sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies

that can be played back, and the higher the number of

quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be

reproduced.

Sound field programs Audio information

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 65 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

66

GLOSSARY

Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal

is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB

and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be

reproduced more faithfully with this system because each

of these signals is independent. The component signal is

also called the “color difference signal” because the

luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.

A monitor with component input jacks is required in order

to use the component signal for output.

Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, the video signal

is composed of three basic elements of a video picture;

color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite

video jack on a video component transmits these three

elements combined.

S-Video signal

With the S-Video signal system, the video signal normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted

as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the

chrominance through the S-Video cable. Using the S

VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and

allows recording and playback of even more beautiful

images.

Video signal information

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 66 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

SPECIFICATIONS

67

English

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

AUDIO SECTION

Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,

Surround back

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω (HTR-5750) ..…………… 90 W

(HTR-5740) …………….. 85 W

Maximum Power (EIAJ)

[China and Korea models]

1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 (HTR-5750) ………….…………………. 130 W

(HTR-5740) …………….……………… 125 W

Dynamic Power (IHF)

8/6/4/2 (HTR-5750) ………..…………………... 120/155/190/235 W

(HTR-5740) ………..…………………... 115/150/185/230 W

DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 (HTR-5740 only) ……………..……… 130 W

IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]

1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 (HTR-5740 only) ..…………………... 95 W

Damping Factor (IHF)

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ………………………….………………. 100 or more

Frequency Response

CD terminal to Front L/R ……….………… 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB

Total Harmonic Distortion

CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 40 W, 8 Ω) ……… 0.06%

Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ………………………….100 dB

Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R ……………………..…………………..………….. 150 µV or less

Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)

CD (5.1 k terminated) to Front L/R ………………….. 60 dB/45 dB

Tone Control (Front L/R)

BASS Boost/Cut ………..………………….……………….. ±10 dB/60 Hz

TREBLE Boost/Cut ……….…………………..…………. ±10 dB/20 kHz

Phones Output ………………………………….……………… 150 mV/100

Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance

CD, etc. ………………..…………………..…………………. 200 mV/47 k

MULTI CH INPUT …………….…………………..…….. 200 mV/47 k

Output Level/Output Impedance

REC OUT ……………………………..…………………..… 200 mV/1.2 k

SUB WOOFER ……………..…………………..……………….. 4 V/1.2 k

VIDEO SECTION

Video Signal Type .……………………….…………………..…… PAL/NTSC

Signal to Noise Ratio ……………….…………………..……………….. 50 dB

Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)

Composite ………………..………………………. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

Component …..…………………..………………. 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB

S-Video (HTR-5750 only) ……………….….. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB

FM SECTION

Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] …..…………………. 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

[Other models] ……………………..……………… 87.50 to 108.00 MHz

Usable Sensitivity (IHF)…………………………………. 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ……………………………..…………………..…. 76 dB/70 dB

Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ……………………………..…………………..…… 0.2%/0.3%

Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ……………………………..……………….. 42 dB

Frequency Response …………………….. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB

AM SECTION

Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] …..………………….... 530 to 1710 kHz

[Other models] ……………………..……………………. 531 to 1611 kHz

Usable Sensitivity ……………………………..………………….…. 300 µV/m

GENERAL

Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] …..………………….... AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] ……………………………………….. AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[China model] …..…………………..………………….... AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] ……………………………….…………… AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] …………………………... AC 230 V, 50 Hz

Power Consumption

[U.S.A. and Canada models] …..…………………..….. 350 W/440 VA

[Other models] ……………………..…………………..……………… 360 W

Standby Power Consumption …………………..………………….. 0.1 W

•AC Outlets

[U.K. and Australia models] ………….. 1 (Total 100 W maximum)

[Other models] ……………………..……… 2 (Total 100 W maximum)

Dimension (W x H x D) …………………..……… 435 x 161 x 416 mm

(17-1/8” x 6-3/8” x 16-3/8”)

Weight ………………………..…………………..………… 11 kg (24 lbs 4 oz)

SPECIFICATIONS

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 67 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

i

LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES

TV

A TANDY 0941

ABEX 1151

ADMIRA 1141

ADVENTURA 1131

AIKO 1121

AIWA 1481

AKAI 0331, 1101, 1111

ALBA 0431

ALLERON 1091

AMBASSADOR 1081

AMSTRAD 0481, 1081

ANAM 0251, 1041, 1051,

1061, 1071

ANAM NATIONAL 1041

AOC 0361, 1021, 1031,

1111, 1161

ARCHER 1161

AUDIOSONIC 1001

AUDIOVOX 1051, 1161

BAUER 0441

BAUR 1001

BEIJING 1511, 1551, 1561

BELCOR 1031

BELL & HOWELL 0981, 0991

BEON 1001

BRADFORD 1051

BROCKWOOD 1031

BROKSONIC 1161

BUSH 1001

CANDLE 0351, 0361, 0961,

0971, 1111, 1131

CAPEHART 1021

CARVER 0101

CATHAY 1001

CELEBRITY 0951

CENTURION 0411

CHANGHONG 1541, 1551, 1561,

1621

CITIZEN 0351, 0361, 0921,

0931, 0941, 0961,

0971, 1111, 1121,

1131

CLAIRTONE 1011

CLARIVOX 1001

CONCERTO 0351, 0971

CONROWA 1751

CONTEC 0901, 0911, 1011,

1051

CORANDO 0941

CRAIG 0251, 1051

CROWN 0941, 1051

CURTIS MATHES 0161, 0361,

0931, 0941,

0981, 1111

CXC 1051

DAEWOO 0291, 0301, 0331,

0721, 0941, 1001,

1031, 1121, 1191,

1531, 1581, 1591,

1601

DANSAI 1001

DAYTRON 0941, 1031

DECCA 0271, 1001

DIXI 0331, 1001, 1071

DUMONT 0891, 1031

DYNATECH 0881

ELECTROBAND 0951, 1011

ELECTROHOME 0941

ELECTRON 0941

ELIN 1001

ELTA 0331

EMERSON 0001, 0021, 0061,

0071, 0081, 0091,

0111, 0811, 0821,

0831, 0841, 0851,

0861, 0871, 0901,

0921, 0941, 0981,

1011, 1031, 1051,

1081, 1091

ENVISION 0361, 1111

ERRES 1001

ETRON 0331

FERGUSON 1001

FINLUX 1001

FISHER 0171, 0801, 0981

FORMENTI 0441

FORMONTI 1001

FORTRESS 1141

FUJITSU 1091

FUNAI 1051, 1091, 1501,

1521

FUTURETECH 1051

GE 0131, 0161, 0201,

0751, 0761, 0771,

0781, 0791, 0811,

0861, 1041

GEC 0271, 1001

GEMINI 0391

GENEXXA 0431

GIBRALTER 0891, 1031, 1111

GOODMANS/TASHIKO

0271, 0661, 1001

GRANADA 1001

GRUNDIG 1781, 1791, 1801,

1811, 1821, 1831,

1841, 1851, 1861,

1871, 1881

GUNPY 1051, 1091

HARMAN/KARDON 0721

HALLMARK 0861

HANSEATIC 1001

HARVARD 1051, 1061

HINARI 1001, 1091

HITACHI 0181, 0351, 0671,

0681, 0691, 0701,

0711, 0871, 0941,

0971, 1351

HYPSON 1001

IMA 1051

INDIANA 1001

INFINITY REFERENCE

0101

INTERFUNK 1001

ITT 0611

JANEIL 1131

JBL 0101

JCB 0951

JENSEN 0311

JINXING 1531, 1541, 1551,

1561, 1571, 1621,

1631, 1641, 1651,

1691, 1731

JVC (VICTOR) 0261, 0281, 0641,

0651, 0661, 0841

KAWASHO 0901

KAYPANI 1021

KENWOOD 0361, 1031, 1111

KLOSS 0631, 0721, 1131

KTV 0921, 0941, 1011,

1051, 1111

LEYCO 1001

LG (GOLDSTAR) 0031, 0121,

0351, 0411, 0731,

0741, 0861, 0941,

0971, 1001, 1031,

1111, 1151

LIESENK & TTER 1001

LLOYTRON 0941

LOEWE 1001

LOGIK 0991, 1771

LUXMAN 0351, 0971

LXI 0101, 0621, 0761,

0861, 0981

MAGNAVOX 0101, 0341, 0391,

0401, 0411, 0421,

0581, 0591, 0601,

0611, 0631, 0661,

0961, 1111

MAJESTIC 0991

MARANTZ 0101, 0221, 0361,

1001, 1111

MARK 1001

MATSUI 0271, 0331, 1001

MEDIATOR 1001

MEGATRON 0691, 0861, 1161

MEI 1011

M-ELECTRONIC 1001

MEMOREX 0331, 0571, 0861,

0971, 0981, 0991,

1771

METZ 1791, 1831, 1891,

1901, 1911, 1921,

1931, 1941

MGA 0361, 0561, 0571,

0861, 1031, 1111

MIDLAND 0751, 0761, 0891,

0941, 1151

MITSUBISHI 0221, 0321, 0561,

0571, 0661, 0861,

1031, 1101, 1381

MONTGOMERY 1091

MOTOROLA 1041, 1141

MTC 0351, 0361, 0881,

0931, 0971, 1011,

1031, 1111

MULTITECH 0881, 1051

NAD 0551, 0621, 0861

NEC 0241, 0351, 0361,

0661, 0971, 1031,

1111, 1321, 1711

NECKERMANN 1001

NEI 1001

NIKKAI 0271, 0431, 1001,

1151

NIKKO 0861, 1111, 1121

NOVABEAM 0721

NTC 1121

ONWA 1051

OPTIMUS 0551

OPTONICA 0541, 1141

ORION 0831, 1001

OSAKI 0271, 1151

OTTO VERSAND 1001

PANASONIC 0101, 0191, 0251,

0751, 1041, 1311,

1371, 1431

PANDA 1541, 1721

PENNY 0161, 0361, 0521,

0531, 0621, 0731,

0751, 0761, 0781,

0791, 0861, 0931,

0941, 1031, 1041,

1111, 1151, 1161

PEONY 1561, 1621

PHILCO 0361, 0581, 0591,

0601, 0611, 0631,

0961, 1031, 1111

PHILIPS 0101, 0401, 1001

PHONOLA 1001

PILOT 0941, 1031, 1111

PIONEER 0511, 0551, 0871

PORTLAND 0941, 1031, 1121

PRICECLUB 0931

PRISM 0751

PROSCAN 0761

PROTECH 1001

PROTON 0501, 0861, 0941,

1021, 1161

PULSAR 0891

PULSER 1031

QUASAR 0251, 0751, 1041

QUELLE 1001

RADIO SHACK 0541, 0941,

1031, 1051,

1151

RADIOLA 1001

RCA 0051, 0141, 0151,

0181, 0411, 0491,

0531, 0761, 0771,

0871, 1031

REALISTIC 0541, 0861, 0941,

0971, 0981, 1031,

1051, 1111, 1151

RHAPSODY 1011

R-LINE 1001

RUNCO 0891, 1111

SAISHO 0331, 1081

SAMPO 0361, 0941, 1021,

1111, 1151

SAMSUNG 0331, 0341, 0351,

0361, 0861, 0931,

0941, 0971, 1001,

1031, 1111, 1151

SAMSUX 0941

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page i Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

ii

SANYO 0171, 0231, 0271,

0661, 0801, 0911,

0981, 1231, 1251,

1261

SBR 1001

SCHEIDER 1001

SCIMITSU 1031

SCOTCH 0861

SCOTT 0831, 0861, 0941,

1031, 1051, 1091

SEARS 0101, 0161, 0171,

0351, 0481, 0521,

0621, 0761, 0801,

0861, 0971, 0981,

1091

SHANGHAI 1561, 1681

SHARP 0461, 0471, 0541,

0661, 0911, 0941,

1141

SHOGUN 1031

SIGNATURE 0991, 1771

SIMPSON 0581, 0961

SOLAVOX 1151

SONOKO 1001

SONTEC 1001

SONY 0371, 0451, 0661,

0841, 0951, 1281,

1441

SOUNDESIGN 0861, 0961, 1051,

1091

SOUNDWAVE 1001

SPECTRICON 1161

SQUAREVIEW 0481

SSS 1031, 1051

STAR-LITE 1051

SUPREM 0951

SUPRE-MACY 1131

SURPA 0351, 0971

SYLVANIA 0101, 0361, 0441,

0581, 0591, 0601,

0611, 0631, 0961,

1111

SYMPHONIC 0481

SYSLINE 1001

TANDY 0271, 0431, 1141

TATUNG 0271, 0881, 1001,

1041, 1161

TCL 1561, 1631, 1701

TECHNICS 0751

TECHWOOD 0351, 0751, 0971

TEKNIKA 0101, 0351, 0571,

0931, 0941, 0961,

0971, 0991, 1031,

1051, 1091, 1121,

1131, 1771

TELETECH 0331

TERA 0501

THAKRAL 1671

THORM 1001

TMK 0351, 0861, 0971,

1081

TOSHIBA 0381, 0521, 0621,

0661, 0931, 0981,

1301

TOSONIC 1011

TOTEVISION 0941

TRICAL 0911

UNIVERSAL 0781, 0791

UNIVERSUM 1001

VECTOR RESEARCH

0361, 1111

VESTEL 1001

VIDEO CONCEPT 1101

VIDIKRON 0101, 0211

VIDTECH 0861, 1031

VIKING 1131

WARDS 0101, 0361, 0451,

0541, 0581, 0591,

0601, 0611, 0771,

0781, 0791, 0861,

0971, 0991, 1031,

1091, 1111, 1771

WATSON 1001

XOGEGO 1611, 1621, 1661,

1741, 1761

YAMAHA 0361, 1031, 1111

YOKO 1001

ZENITH 0011, 0041, 0891,

0991, 1771

ZONDA 1161

CABLE TV

ABC 0256, 0376

ANTRONIX 0136

ARCHER 0136, 0286

BBT 0076

CABLETIME 0166

CABLEVISION 0196

COLOUR VOICE 0306, 0346

COMTRONICS 0216, 0276

EAGLE COMTRONICS

0276

EASTERN 0066

ELECTRICORD 0206

ELECTUS 0266

GE 0116, 0126

GEC CABLE SYSTEM

0196

HAMLIN H5 0676

HAMLIN H6 0666

HAMLIN H6S 0656

HAMLIN H8 0646

HAMLIN H9 0636

JERROLD 0256

JERROLD 400L 0626

JERROLD 450L 0616

JERROLD 550 0606

JERROLD OSD CATV

0596

JERROLD SPRUCER

0436

MAGNAVOX/PHILIPS

0416, 0426

MAMM 0296

MEMOREX 0386

MOVIE TIME 0146, 0206

NORTHCOAST 0016

NSC 0146

OAK 0106

OAK SIGMA 450 0546

OAK SIGMA 550 0536

PANASONIC TZ 120/130

0476

PANASONIC TZ 170/180

0446

PANASONIC TZ140 0466

PANASONIC TZ150/160

0456

PARAGON 0386

PHILIPS 0036, 0216, 0306,

0316, 0326, 0336,

0346

PIONEER 0006, 0086

PIONEER BR50 0846

PIONEER BR60/70/80/81/82

0696

PIONEER BR90 0556

PULSAR 0386

RCA DIGITAL SATELLITE

SYSTEM 0396, 0406

REALISTIC 0136

REGENCY/EASTERN0686

RUNCO 0386

SAMSUNG 0276

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 175/475

0576

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 75

0366, 0586

SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 8650

0566

SIGNAL 0276

SL MARX 0276

SPECTAVISION 0236

STANDARD COMPONENTS

0186

STARCOM V 0256

STARGATE 0276

SYLVANIA/TEXSCAN

0376, 0496

TEKNIKA 0176

TELESERVICE 0056

TELEVIEW 0276

TEXSCAN 0186, 0376

TFC 0026

TOCOM 0226, 0356

TOCOM 5503A 0526

TOCOM 5503VIP/5507

0516

TOCOM TC56 0506

TOSHIBA 0386

TUDI 0046

UNIKA 0136

UNIVERSAL 0136, 0156, 0206,

0286

VIDEOWAY 0096

VIEWSTAR 0216

ZENITH 0246, 0386, 0486

SATELLITE TUNER

ALPHA STAR 0826

CHAPARRAL 0756

ECHOSTAR 0836

GENERAL INSTRUMENT

0776, 0876

HTS 0836

HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS

0816

JERROLD 0776, 0786

PANASONIC 0806

PRIMESTAR 0776, 0786

RCA 0766

SONY 0796

(DBS)

HITACHI 0856

MAGNAVOX 0886

MEMOREX 0886

PANASONIC 0896

PHILIPS 0886

SONY 0906

STAR CHOICE 0876

TOSHIBA 0866, 0916

UNIDEN 0886

VCR

A TANDY 0902

ADVENTURA 0992

AIKO 0982

AIWA 0992

AKAI 0262, 0942, 0952,

0962, 0972

AMERICAN HIGH 0932

AMSTRAD 0992

ASA 0002, 0912

ASHA 0922

AUDIO DYNAMICS 0202

AUDIOVOX 0912

BEAUMARK 0922

BELL & HOWELL 0902

BLAUPUNKT 0412

BROKSONIC 0872, 0882, 0892

BUSH 0852

CALIX 0912

CANON 0862, 0932

CCE 0852, 0982

CITIZEN 0912, 0982

COLT 0852

CRAIG 0832, 0842, 0852,

0912, 0922

CURTIS MATHES 0662, 0822,

0932

CYBERNEX 0922

DAEWOO 0802, 0812, 0982

DBX 0202

DYNATECH 0472, 0992

ELECTROHOME 0912

ELECTROPHONIC 0912

EMEREX 0792

EMERSON 0072, 0132, 0142,

0152, 0162, 0172,

0182, 0192, 0212,

0702, 0712, 0722,

0732, 0742, 0752,

0762, 0772, 0782,

0872, 0882, 0892,

0912, 0952, 0992,

1072

FINLUX 0002, 0992

FISHER 0682, 0692, 0842,

0902

FUJI 0672, 0932

FUNAI 0992

GARRARD 0992

GE 0662, 0822, 0932

GO VIDEO 0642, 0652

GOODMANS 0402

GRADIENTE 0992

GRANDA 0612, 0902

GRUNDIG 0002

HARLEY DAVIDSON

0992

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page ii Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

iii

HARMAN/KARDON

0632, 1082

HARWOOD 0752, 0852

HEADQUARTER 0612

HI-Q 0842

HINARI 0852

HITACHI 0102, 0562, 0572,

0582, 0592, 0602,

0992

ITT 0942

JVC (VICTOR) 0202, 0522, 0532,

0542, 0552

KENWOOD 0202, 0542, 0612,

0632, 0902

KLH 0852

KODAK 0912, 0932

LG (GOLDSTAR) 0082, 0632,

0912

LLOYD 0992

LOGIK 0852

LUXOR 0942

LXI 0022, 0912

MAGNAVOX 0002, 0482, 0492,

0502, 0512, 0932

MAGNIN 0922

MARANTZ 0002, 0202, 0402,

0632, 0932

MARTA 0912

MATSUSHITA 0932

MATSUI 0722

MEI 0222, 0932

MEMOREX 0232, 0242, 0472,

0512, 0612, 0842,

0902, 0912, 0922,

0932, 0992

MGA 0762, 0952

MGA TECHNOLOGY

0922

MINOLTA 0592, 0602

MITSUBISHI 0452, 0462, 0542,

0762, 0952, 1082

MOTOROLA 0472, 0932

MTC 0922, 0992

MULTITECH 0852, 0992

NAD 0442

NEC 0122, 0202, 0292,

0422, 0432, 0542,

0632

NIKKO 0912

NOBLEX 0922

OLYMPUS 0412, 0932

OPTIMUS 0442, 0472, 0912

OPTONICA 0402

ORION 0212, 0722, 0742,

0772

OSAKI 0912

PANASONIC 0012, 0052, 0092,

0222, 0372, 0382,

0392, 0412, 0932

PENNY 0202, 0432, 0602,

0632, 0692, 0912,

0922, 0932

PENTAX 0592, 0602

PERDIO 0992

PHILCO 0002, 0932

PHILIPS 0002, 0282, 0402,

0492, 0932

PILOT 0912

PIONEER 0442, 0542

PROSCAN 1002, 1012, 1022,

1032, 1042, 1052,

1062

PULSAR 0512

QUARTER 0612

QUARTZ 0272, 0612

QUASAR 0382, 0392, 0932

RADIO SHACK 0912, 0992

RADIX 0912

RANDEX 0912

RCA 0112, 0382, 0392,

0482, 0592, 0602,

0662, 0822, 0942

REALISTIC 0402, 0472, 0612,

0682, 0842, 0902,

0912, 0922, 0932,

0992

RICOH 0352, 0362

SAISHO 0212, 0582, 0722,

0732, 0742, 0772

SALORA 0612, 0762

SAMSUNG 0212, 0312, 0922,

0962

SANKY 0472, 0512

SANSUI 0292, 0542, 0832

SANYO 0242, 0612, 0842,

0902, 0922

SBR 0002, 0282

SCHEIDER 0852

SCOTT 0342, 0712, 0762,

0872, 0882, 0892

SEARS 0302, 0592, 0602,

0612, 0682, 0692,

0842, 0902, 0912,

0932

SHARP 0402, 0472

SHINTOM 0852

SHOGUN 0922

SINGER 0852

SONY 0032, 0332, 0352,

0362, 0672, 0792,

0932

STS 0602

SUNPAK 0352

SYLVANIA 0002, 0492, 0502,

0762, 0932, 0992

SYMPHONIC 0992

TANDY 0992

TASHIKO 0712, 0992

TEAC 0992

TECHNICS 0932

TEKNIKA 0322, 0912, 0932,

0992

TELEFUNKEN 0252

TMK 0212, 0732, 0772,

0922

TOSHIBA 0062, 0302, 0342,

0622, 0682, 0712,

0762

TOTEVISION 0912, 0922

UNITECH 0922

VECTOR RESEARCH

0202, 0432, 0632

VIDEO CONCEPTS

0202, 0432, 0632,

0952

WARDS 0322, 0402, 0472,

0482, 0602, 0712,

0842, 0852, 0922,

0932, 0992

YAMAHA 0202, 0632

ZENITH 0042, 0362, 0512,

0672

DVD PLAYER

AKAI 0058

AIWA 0218

DENON 0188

HITACHI 0198

JVC (VICTOR) 0088, 0178

KENWOOD 0148

LG (GOLDSTAR) 0228

MAGNAVOX 0128

MITSUBISHI 0138

ONKYO 0068, 0128

PANASONIC 0028

PHILIPS 0098, 0128

PIONEER 0108, 0118

PROSCAN 0158

RCA 0158

SAMSUNG 0078

SHARP 0038

SONY 0018

TECHNICS 0028

THOMSON 0168

TOSHIBA 0048, 0128

YAMAHA 0008, 0028, 0098

ZENITH 0128

DVD RECORDER

PANASONIC 0238, 0248, 0258

PHILIPS 0208

PIONEER 0278, 0288, 0298

TOSHIBA 0268

YAMAHA 0208

LD PLAYER

AIWA 0157

DENON 0147

DISCO VISION0017

FUNAI 0157

HITACHI (E) 0017

KENWOOD 0087, 0107

MAGNAVOX 0027

MARANTZ 0027

MITSUBISHI 0137

NAD 0137

PANASONIC 0077, 0177

PHILIPS 0027

PIONEER 0017, 0037, 0137

RCA 0167

REALISTIC 0157

SHARP 0127

SONY 0047, 0057, 0117

VICTOR 0097

YAMAHA 0007, 0067

CD PLAYER

ACOUSTIC RESEARCH

1295

ADC 0025, 0065

ADCOM 0205, 0255, 1015

ADS 0265

AIWA 0295, 0945, 1035,

1055

AKAI 0175, 0485, 0535

ALPINE 1215, 1305

AUDIO-TECHNICA 0545

BSR 0245, 0655, 0775

CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB

0055

CAPETRONIC 1205

CARRERA 0245

CARVER 0285, 1135

CASIO 0345

CROWN 0185

CURTIS MATHES 0345

DENON 0275, 0875, 0885

DEUAL (E) 0505

DYNAMIC BASS (H)

0555

EMERSON 0205, 0325, 1105

EROICA 1275

FISHER 0095, 0555, 0925,

1005

GARRARD 0365

GENEXXA 0305, 0325, 1105

HARMAN/KARDON 0105, 0175,

0465, 0995

HITACHI 0195, 0205, 0505,

0815

INKEL 0115, 0395

JVC (VICTOR) 0315

KENWOOD 0045, 0095, 0405,

0585, 0725, 0735,

0745, 0755, 0895

KYOCERA 0025

LG (GOLDSTAR) 1135, 1225,

1265, 1335

LUXMAN 0075, 0425, 0675,

0705, 0715, 0985

MAGNAVOX 0165, 0215, 0645,

0955

MARANTZ 0215, 0235, 0375,

0785, 1345

MCINTOSH 0355, 1085

MCS 0905, 1315

MEMOREX 0205, 0225, 0235,

0305, 0325, 1105

MGA 0135

MISSION 0215

MITSUBISHI 0135, 0445

MTC 1255

NAD 0035, 0615, 0685,

0695

NAKAMICHI 0125, 0435, 0515

NEC 0255, 0905, 0965

NIKKO 0545, 1005

ONKYO 0155, 0455, 0495,

0805, 1155

OPTIMUS 0225, 0245, 0555,

0595, 0845, 0855,

0865, 0895, 0935

PANASONIC 0055, 0825, 1095,

1125

PENNY 0905

PHILIPS 0165, 0215

PIONEER 0305, 0935, 1045

PROTON 0215, 1185

QUASAR 0055

RCA 0205, 0915, 1115

REALISTIC 0205, 0225, 0235,

0325, 0555, 0845

REVOX 1175

ROTEL 0215

SABA TELECOMMANDER (E)

0505

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page iii Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

iv

SAE 0215

SAMSUNG 1285

SANSUI 0215, 0625, 0975,

1025, 1105

SANYO 0145, 0555, 0635,

0765

SCOTT 0325, 1105

SEARS 0345

SHARP 0235, 0665, 0895,

1065, 1075

SHERWOOD 0115, 0235, 0395,

0475

SIEMENTS GARRARD

1245

SIGNATURE 0175

SONTEC 1165

SONY 0065, 0565, 0865,

1145

STARON 1235

STS 0025

SYLVANIA 0215

SYMPHONIC 0335

TANDY 0305

TANGBERG 1195

TEAC 0235, 0335, 0385,

0525, 0795, 0835,

1355

TECHNICS 0055, 0605, 1095

TECHWOOD 1325

TELEFUNKEN (E) 0505

THOMSON (E) 0505

TOSHIBA 0035, 0685

VECTOR RESEARCH

0065, 1135

WARDS 0175

YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 0085,

0415, 0545, 0575,

1065

CD RECORDER

HITACHI 0474

JVC (VICTOR) 0504

MARANTZ 0484, 0494

PHILIPS 0444

PIONEER 0454

YAMAHA 0414

MD RECORDER

KENWOOD 0384

PIONEER 0424

SHARP 0434

SONY 0394

YAMAHA 0024, 0394, 0404,

0514

TAPE DECK

AIWA 0094, 0214, 0224

AKAI 0184

CARVER 0094

DENON 0304

FISHER 0144

GARRARD 0194, 0204

JVC (VICTOR) 0274, 0284, 0294

KENWOOD 0124, 0134, 0154,

0234, 0244, 0264

MAGNAVOX 0094

MARANTZ 0094, 0344

MITSUBISHI 0184

OPTIMUS 0034, 0064, 0204,

0334

ONKYO 0364, 0374

PHILIPS 0094

PIONEER 0034, 0044, 0064

REVOX 0354

SANSUI 0094, 0344

SHARP 0264

SHERWOOD 0334

SONY 0054, 0084, 0324

TEAC 0194, 0254

TECHNICS 0074, 0314

WAR DS 0 03 4

YAMAHA 0004, 0014, 0104,

0114, 0164, 0174,

0264

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page iv Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

2004 All rights reserved.

Printed in Malaysia WC85350

00_HTR-5750_U_EN.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 10:29 AM

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Yamaha dgx 220 инструкция на русском
  • Yamaha bolt инструкция по эксплуатации
  • Xy j02 инструкция схема подключения
  • Xy auto iso ts16949 магнитола инструкция по применению
  • Xw60k dixell инструкция на русском